YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2007 All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia WK97760
GEBRL
AV Amplifier
OWNER’S MANUAL
English
RX-Z11_EX-cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, October 4, 2007 10:13 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
2 En
Front panel
MASTER
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
MIC
OPTIMIZER
AUDI O
SELECT
SPEAKERS
AB
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
ON/OFF
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MULTI
ZONE
STRAIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
MENU
TONE CONTROL
ZONE
CONTROLS
REC OUT/
ZONE 2
EFFECT
PUSH ENTER
PROGRAM
RL
OPTICAL
HDMI IN USB
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE 2
MIC
OPTIMIZER
AUDIO
SELECT
SPEAKERS
AB
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
MULTI
ZONE
STRAIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
MENU
TONE CONTROL
ZONE
CONTROLS
REC OUT/
ZONE 2
EFFECT
PUSH ENTER
PROGRAM
RL
OPTICAL
HDMI IN USB
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 3 ZONE 4
ZONE 2
AB
D
F
C
E
G
LKM
HIJ
01EN_00_Mihiraki_DSP-Z11_EX.fm Page 2 Tuesday, October 23, 2007 6:09 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
3 En
Remote control
AMP
TV
SOURCE
ZONE
MACROSELECT
SETUP ID
MODE
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
VOLUME
DVD CD
V-AUXMULTI
AVTV
PHONO
CD-R
POWER
STANDBY
POWERPOWER
DTV DVR VCR
DOCK
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
TAPE
CBL
SAT
NET
USB
REC
SRCH MODELEVEL
BAND
MENUTITLE
CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL 2 LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
MEMORY
PC/MCX
RETURN DISPLAY
PRESET/CH
ENTER A-E
MUTE
2
1
NET RADIO
USB
MOVIE STEREO SUR. DECODEENHANCER
THX STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT EXTD SUR.
PARTY SLEEP HDMI OUT AUDIO SEL
TV VOL TV CH TV
3D DSP
1234
5678
ENT
MUTE AUDIO
INPUT
90
10
CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL 2 LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
MOVIE STEREO SUR. DECODEENHANCER
THX STRAIGHT
1234
5678
9
0
1
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
L
K
M
N
O
P
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
B
C
R
Q
Backlight mode
The remote control is equipped with
the motion sensor and the remote
control lights up the backlight
corresponding to the motions or
operation. If you do not want to
lights up the backlight when this unit
detects motions, change the backlight
mode (see page 104).
Simplified remote control
This products is supplied with the
simplified remote control. Refer to
“Simplified remote control” on
page 110.
Optional component control
area button ( )
You can control the desired
component without changing the
input source of this unit (see
page 102).
01EN_00_Mihiraki_DSP-Z11_EX.fm Page 3 Tuesday, October 23, 2007 6:09 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
4 En
Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland
Thank you for having chosen a Yamaha product. In the unlikely event that your Yamaha product needs guarantee service, please contact the dealer from whom it was purchased. If
you experience any difficulty, please contact Yamaha representative office in your country. You can find full details on our website (http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or
http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident).
The product is guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two years from the date of the original purchase. Yamaha undertakes, subject to the
conditions listed below, to have the faulty product or any part(s) repaired, or replaced at Yamaha’s discretion, without any charge for parts or labour. Yamaha reserves the right to
replace a product with that of a similar kind and/or value and condition, where a model has been discontinued or is considered uneconomic to repair.
Conditions
1. The original invoice or sales receipt (showing date of purchase, product code and dealer’s name) MUST accompany the defective product, along with a statement detailing the
fault. In the absence of this clear proof of purchase, Yamaha reserves the right to refuse to provide free of charge service and the product may be returned at the customer’s
expense.
2. The product MUST have been purchased from an AUTHORISED Yamaha dealer within the European Economic Area (EEA) or Switzerland.
3. The product must not have been the subject of any modifications or alterations, unless authorised in writing by Yamaha.
4. The following are excluded from this guarantee:
a. Periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear.
b. Damage resulting from:
(1) Repairs performed by the customer himself or by an unauthorised third party.
(2) Inadequate packaging or mishandling, when the product is in transit from the customer. Please note that it is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the product is
adequately packaged when returning the product for repair.
(3) Misuse, including but not limited to (a) failure to use the product for its normal purpose or in accordance with Yamaha’s instructions on the proper use, maintenance and
storage, and (b) installation or use of the product in a manner inconsistent with the technical or safety standards in force in the country where it is used.
(4) Accidents, lightning, water, fire, improper ventilation, battery leakage or any cause beyond Yamaha’s control.
(5) Defects of the system into which this product is incorporated and/or incompatibility with third party products.
(6) Use of a product imported into the EEA and/or Switzerland, not by Yamaha, where that product does not conform to the technical or safety standards of the country of use
and/or to the standard specification of a product sold by Yamaha in the EEA and/or Switzerland.
(7) Non AV (Audio Visual) related products.
(Products subject to “Yamaha AV Guarantee Statement” are defined in our website at http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or
http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident.)
5. Where the guarantee differs between the country of purchase and the country of use of the product, the guarantee of the country of use shall apply.
6. Yamaha may not be held responsible for any losses or damages, whether direct, consequential or otherwise, save for the repair or replacement of the product.
7. Please backup any custom settings or data, as Yamaha may not be held responsible for any alteration or loss to such settings or data.
8. This guarantee does not affect the consumer’s statutory rights under applicable national laws in force or the consumer’s rights against the dealer arising from their sales/purchase
contract.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
5 En
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep
it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place –
away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or
cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the
left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or
transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot,
and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a
room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which
may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal
injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit
and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the
top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration
on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this
unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause
electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order
not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it
may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are
complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing
damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the
plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the
finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12
Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a
higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to
this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for
any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than
specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor
antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning
storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha
service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never
be opened for any reasons.
15
When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation),
disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be
reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating
errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press BMASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main room, Zone 2,
Zone 3, and Zone 4 and then disconnect the AC power plug from the AC
wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for
your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet.
Voltages are as follows:
.................................................. 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire
or like.
21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause
hearing loss.
■ For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug
supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate
3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described
below.
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with
bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet.
■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not
disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this
unit by
B
MASTER ON/OFF
. In this state, this unit is designed to
consume a very small quantity of power.
Note
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not
correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your
plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which
is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked
with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the
three pin plug.
This symbol mark is according to the EU directive
2002/96/EC.
This symbol mark means that electrical and
electronic equipment, at their end-of-life, should
be disposed of separately from your household
waste.
Please act according to your local rules and do not
dispose of your old products with your normal
household waste.
6 En
Notices ..........................................................................................8
Features...................................................................................... 10
Getting started........................................................................... 11
Quick start guide.......................................................................13
Connections ............................................................................... 20
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
(YPAO) ..................................................................................42
Before starting the automatic setup ...............................................42
Using the quick automatic setup....................................................43
Using the basic automatic setup ....................................................44
Reviewing the result of the automatic setup .............................45
Using advanced automatic setup ...................................................46
Playback..................................................................................... 50
Basic procedure .............................................................................50
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component...............................50
Selecting the HDMI OUT jack......................................................51
Selecting the front speaker set.......................................................51
Using the Zone B feature...........................................................51
Using your headphones .................................................................51
Playing video sources in the background of an audio source........51
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)....................................................................52
Muting the audio output ................................................................52
Using the sleep timer .....................................................................52
Canceling the sleep timer ..........................................................52
Operating this unit
by using the graphical user interface (GUI) menu ....................53
Items in GUI menu ....................................................................53
Basic controls in the GUI menu ................................................53
Basic operation of the GUI menu
by using the front panel controls...........................................53
Sound field programs ...............................................................54
Selecting sound field programs .....................................................54
Sound field program descriptions..................................................54
For audio music sources ............................................................55
For various sources....................................................................57
For visual sources of music.......................................................57
For parties..................................................................................58
For game programs....................................................................58
For movie sources .....................................................................58
Stereo playback .........................................................................59
For compression artifacts
(Compressed Music Enhancer mode) ...................................59
Surround decoder mode.............................................................59
THX Surround mode.................................................................59
Using sound field programs without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)........................................................60
Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with
headphones (SILENT CINEMA)..........................................60
Using CINEMA DSP HD³ mode...................................................60
Enjoying unprocessed input sources..............................................60
Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode ......................................60
Using audio features ................................................................. 61
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ..............................................................61
Adjusting the tonal quality ............................................................61
Adjusting the speaker level............................................................61
Recording................................................................................... 62
Using iPod™.............................................................................. 64
Controlling iPod™........................................................................ 64
Remote control operation ......................................................... 64
Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode............................ 64
Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode ............................. 64
The functions of the play information display.......................... 65
Using Network/USB features ................................................... 66
Navigating the network and USB menus...................................... 66
Remote control operation ......................................................... 67
Using a PC server or Yamaha MCX-2000 ................................... 68
Installing Windows Media Player 11 on your PC .................... 68
Registering this unit on the Yamaha MCX-2000 ..................... 68
Using the Internet Radio ............................................................... 69
Storing your favorite Internet Radio stations
with bookmarks .................................................................... 69
Using a USB storage device or a USB portable audio player ...... 69
Using shortcut buttons .................................................................. 70
Assigning the items to the numeric button (1-8) ...................... 70
Select an item by using numeric buttons (1-8)......................... 70
Advanced sound configurations .............................................. 72
Selecting decoders ........................................................................ 72
Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources
(surround decode mode)....................................................... 72
Decoder descriptions ................................................................ 72
Selecting decoders used with sound field programs................. 72
Selecting decoders for multi-channel sources .......................... 72
Playing back sources with the THX Surround modes .................. 73
For 2-channel sources............................................................... 73
For multi-channel sources ........................................................ 73
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu ..................................... 74
GUI menu overview...................................................................... 76
Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu) .................................... 77
Input Select ................................................................................... 81
Manual Setup (Basic).................................................................... 83
Manual Setup (Volume)................................................................ 86
Manual Setup (Sound) .................................................................. 86
Manual Setup (Video)................................................................... 89
Manual Setup (Multi Zone) .......................................................... 91
Manual Setup (Network) .............................................................. 92
Manual Setup (Option) ................................................................. 93
Signal Info. (Input signal information) ......................................... 95
Language....................................................................................... 95
Saving and recalling the system settings
(System Memory).................................................................. 96
Saving the current system settings................................................ 96
Saving by the SYSTEM MEMORY buttons............................ 96
Saving by the GUI menu operation .......................................... 96
Renaming the stored settings.................................................... 97
Saved parameters for the main zone......................................... 98
Saved parameters for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 ..................... 98
Loading the stored system settings ............................................... 98
Loading by the SYSTEM MEMORY buttons ......................... 98
Loading by the GUI menu operation........................................ 98
Using examples............................................................................. 99
Example 1: Switching the settings
of this unit according to the using situations........................ 99
Example 2: Switching the setting of this unit according
to the environment of the listening room ........................... 100
Controlling this unit by using the Web browser
(Web Control Center)......................................................... 101
Contents
Introduction
Preparation
Basic Operation
Internal Source Operation
Advanced Operation
Contents
7 En
PreparationIntroduction
Basic Operation
Internal Source
Operation
Advanced
Operation
Additional
Information
Remote control features ......................................................... 102
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components........................102
Controlling this unit ................................................................102
Controlling a TV .....................................................................102
Controlling other components.................................................103
Selecting a component to be controlled ..................................103
Controlling optional components (Option mode) ...................103
Customizing the remote control ..................................................104
Setting the backlight mode of the remote control (LIGHT)........104
Setting remote control codes (P-SET).........................................104
Programming codes from other remote controls (LEARN)........105
Changing source names in the display window (RNAME) ........106
Macro programming features ......................................................107
Recalling programmed macro-operations ...............................107
Default macro functions..........................................................108
Programming macro operations (MACRO)............................108
Clearing configurations ...............................................................109
Clearing function sets (CLEAR).............................................109
Clearing a learned function (ERASE).....................................109
Simplified remote control............................................................110
Setting the controlling zone of the simplified remote control
..........110
Replacing the battery in the simplified remote control...........110
Using multi-zone configuration ............................................. 111
Step1: Planning the multi-zone system .......................................111
Step2: Connecting the speakers, external amplifiers,
and/or other components .........................................................112
Using the internal amplifier of this unit ..................................112
Using external amplifiers ........................................................113
Using the ZONE DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack..............113
Connecting Zone video monitor..............................................114
Video signal up-conversion
to the zone component video signals ..................................114
Using REMOTE IN/OUT and TRIGGER OUT jacks
for Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4 ..........................................115
Step3: Setting the zone parameter ...............................................116
Assigning the zone speakers ...................................................116
Controlling Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4........................................116
Basic operation........................................................................116
Selecting the input source Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 ............117
Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4
...........117
Setting the sleep timer for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 ............117
Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4
...........118
Using the Zone OSD ...............................................................118
Using the party mode ..................................................................118
Advanced setup....................................................................... 119
Using the advanced setup menu ..................................................119
Troubleshooting ...................................................................... 122
Glossary ................................................................................... 128
Parametric equalizer information......................................... 135
Block diagrams ....................................................................... 136
Specifications........................................................................... 138
Index ........................................................................................ 140
List of remote control codes................................................... 144
Additional Information
“
B
MASTER ON/OFF” or “
3
DVD” (example) indicates the name of
the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the cover
pages at the top of this manual for the information about each position of
the parts.
8 En
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other
U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered
trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master
Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
THX, the THX logo and Ultra2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. which may
be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. All other trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and
Thomson.
This amplifier supports network connections.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo, and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface”
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Internet Explorer, Windows Media
Audio, Windows Media Connect, and Windows Media Player are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for
Windows Media contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect the
integrity of their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual property,
including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated.
This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WM-DRM
Software).
If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been
compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure Content Owners) may
request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Software’s right to acquire new
licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does not
alter the WM-DRM Software’s ability to play unprotected content. A list of
revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download
a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may,
in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list onto your
device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.
Notices
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the
front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button
names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the
button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications
are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case
of differences between the manual and product, the product has
priority.
• This unit is equipped with GUI language switching capability. In this
manual, the illustrations of the GUI are examples when you set the
GUI language to English.
•“
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “
3
DVD” (example) indicates the
name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to
the cover pages at the top of this manual for the information about
each position of the parts.
• The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding
reference page(s).
iPod
TM
Introduction
Features ................................................................................................ 10
Getting started ..................................................................................... 11
Supplied accessories ................................................................................................................ 11
Using the remote control ......................................................................................................... 12
Opening and closing the front panel door ............................................................................... 12
VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) ...................................................... 12
Quick start guide .................................................................................. 13
Preparation: Check the items ................................................................................................... 13
Step 1: Set up your speakers .................................................................................................... 14
Step 2: Connect your Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player and other components .......................... 16
Step 3: Turn on the power and start playback ......................................................................... 17
What do you want to do with this unit? ................................................................................... 18
Introduction
10 En
Built-in 11-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 140 W + 140 W
Center: 140 W
Surround: 140 W + 140 W
Surround back: 140 W + 140 W
Front presence: 50 W + 50 W
Rear presence: 50 W + 50 W
Sound field programs ☞ P. 54
◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound fields
◆ THX Ultra2 Plus surround modes ☞ P. 73
◆ CINEMA DSP HD³ mode for creating intensive and accurate
stereoscopic sound field ☞ P. 60
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of
compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality
multi-channel source playback ☞ P. 59
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ☞ P. 60
◆ SILENT CINEMA ☞ P. 60
Digital audio decoders
◆ Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder
◆ DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio decoder
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder
◆ DTS NEO:6 decoder
HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ☞ P. 28
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well
as multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.3a
◆ Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync) information
capability
◆ Deep Color (30/36 bit) and xvYCC color video signal transmission
capability
◆ High refresh rate and high resolution video signals capability
◆ High definition digital audio format signals capability
◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion (composite video ↔
S-video ↔ component video → HDMI digital video) capability for
monitor out
◆ Analog and HDMI video signal up-scaling ☞ P. 89
iPod controlling capability ☞ P. 64
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the
YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod
nano, and iPod mini
Network features ☞ P. 66
◆ NETWORK port to connect a PC and Yamaha MCX-2000 or access the
Internet Radio via LAN
◆ DHCP automatic or manual network configuration
USB features ☞ P. 69
◆ USB ports to connect a USB storage device, USB Hard disc drive, or a
USB portable audio player
Web control feature
◆ Web control capability of this unit by using a Web browser
☞ P. 101
Automatic speaker setup features
◆ Advanced YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for
automatic speaker setup ☞ P. 42
◆ Specialized parametric equalizer for the standing wave reduction
☞ P. 44
◆ Multiple point measurement feature for multiple listening positions
☞ P. 46
◆ Speaker angle measurement feature for the optimized CINEMA DSP
effect ☞ P. 60
Other features
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ GUI (graphical user interface) menus that allow you to optimize this unit
to suit your individual audio/video system ☞ P. 74
◆ GUI display menu language switching capability (English, Japanese,
French, German, Spanish and Russian) ☞ P. 95
◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input
☞ P. 35
◆ Multiple subwoofers connection capability ☞ P. 25
◆ Analog video interlace/progressive conversion from 480i (NTSC)/576i
(PAL) to 480p/576p
◆ S-video signal input/output capability ☞ P. 29
◆ Component video input/output capability includes (4 COMPONENT
VIDEO INs and 2 MONITOR OUTs) ☞ P. 28
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ☞ P. 28
◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources ☞ P. 61
◆ Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability ☞ P. 86
◆ Adaptive DSP effect level controlling capability ☞ P. 86
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning, macro and
buttons and display backlight capability ☞ P. 102
◆ Simplified remote control ☞ P. 110
◆ Advanced amplifier assign capability ☞ P. 119
◆ Flexible assignable trigger out jack ☞ P. 94
◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2/Zone 3/
Zone 4 using ZONE CONTROLS ☞ P. 91
◆ Zone 2 video output (composite and component) and displaying OSD
(on-screen display) capability ☞ P. 114
◆ System Memory capability for saving and recalling multiple system
parameter settings ☞ P. 96
◆ Sleep timer ☞ P. 52
Features
11 En
Introduction
Check that you received all of the following parts.
The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models.
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
1 Take off the battery compartment cover.
2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, LR03)
according to the polarity markings
(+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment.
3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place.
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the operation range of the remote
control decreases.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese
batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of
batteries may have the same shape and color.
• We strongly recommend that you use alkaline batteries.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching
the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean
the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them
correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if
exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the
memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired
functions that may have been cleared.
Getting started
Supplied accessories
Note
CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL 2 LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
MOVIE STEREO SUR. DECODEENHANCER
THX STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT EXTD SUR.
PARTY SLEEP HDMI OUT AUDIO SEL
TV VOL TV CH TV
3D DSP
1234
5678
ENT
MUTE AUDIO
INPUT
90
10
AMP
TV
SOURCE
ZONE
MACROSELECT
SETUP ID
MODE
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
DVD CD
V-A UXMULTI
AVTV
PHONO
CD-R
POWER
STANDBY
POWERPOWER
DTV DVR VCR
DOCK
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
TAPE
CBL
SAT
NET
USB
2
1
VOLUME
REC
SRCH MODELEVEL
BAND
MENUTITLE
MEMORY
PC/MCX
RETURN DISPLAY
PRESET/CH
ENTER A-E
MUTE
NET RADIO
USB
FRONT
DIRECTION
Remote control Batteries (4)
(AAA, LR03)
Optimizer microphone
Power cable
(Two for Asia model)
POWER
STANDBY
INPUT
SYSTEM MEMORY
4132
INT SOURCE VOLUME
MUTE
PRESET
Simplified remote control Microphone base
1
3
2
Notes
Getting started
12 En
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control
sensor on this unit during operation.
6LIGHT
Lights up the remote control buttons and the display window (4).
Display window (4)
[1] ID1/ID2 indicator
Indicates the currently selected remote control ID (see
page 119).
[2] Transmit indicator
Appears while the remote control is sending infrared signals.
[3] Zone indicators
Indicates the currently controlling zone (see page 116).
[4] Information display
Shows the name of the selected input source that you can
control.
Infrared window (1)
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component
you want to operate.
Operation mode selector (F)
The function of some buttons depends on the operation mode
selector position.
AMP
Operates the amplifier function of this unit.
SOURCE
Operates the component selected with an input selector button
(see page 103).
TV
Operates the TV (see page 102).
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of
conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open
the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the
door closed when not using these controls.
Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise
to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver.
Voltages are as follows:
...................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Using the remote control
MASTER
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
MIC
OPTIMIZER
AUDIO
SELECT
SPEAKERS
AB
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
ON/OFF
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MULTI
ZONE
STRAIGHT TUNING MODE
ZONE ON/OFF
MENU
TONE CONTROL
ZONE
CONTROLS
REC OUT/
ZONE 2
MEMORY FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
EFFECT DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO
CATEGORY
SEARCH MODE
PUSH ENTER
PROGRAM
R
L
OPTICAL
HDMI IN USB
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 3 ZONE 4
ZONE 2
30 30
Approximately
6 m (20 ft)
Remote control sensor
MAIN
ZONE 2
ID 2ID 1
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
Notes
Backlight mode
The remote control is equipped with the motion sensor and the
remote control lights up the backlight corresponding to the
motions or operation. If you do not want to lights up the
backlight when this unit detects motions, change the backlight
mode (see page 104).
Opening and closing the front panel door
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
Caution
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must
be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable
into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE
SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.
230-
240V
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
Voltage indication
13 En
Introduction
The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD movie playback in your home theater.
See pages 21 to 24 for details of the speaker placement.
In these steps, you need the following supplied accessory.
❏ Power cable
The following items are not included in the package of this unit.
❏ Speakers
❏ Front speaker ................................................... x 2
❏ Center speaker ................................................ x 1
❏ Surround speaker ............................................ x 4
❏ Front presence speaker .................................. x 2
❏ Rear presence speaker ................................... x 2
Select magnetically shielded speakers. The minimum
required speakers are two front speakers. The priority of the
requirement of other speakers is as follows:
1. Two surround speakers
2. One center speaker
3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)
4. Two front presence speakers
5. Two rear presence speakers
❏ Active subwoofers ............................................... x 2
Select active subwoofers equipped with an RCA input jack.
❏ Speaker cable ..................................................... x 11
❏ Subwoofer cables ................................................ x 2
Select monaural RCA cables.
❏ HDMI cables ......................................................... x 2
Select HDMI cables shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the
HDMI logo printed on it.
❏ Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player ................................ x 1
Select Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player equipped with an
HDMI output jack.
❏ Video monitor........................................................ x 1
Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector equipped
with an HDMI input jack.
Quick start guide
Front right
Right
subwoofer
Surround
back right
Surround left
Front left
Surround
back left
Surround
right
Center
Right front
presence
Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player
Left
subwoofer
Left front
presence
Left rear
presence
Right rear
presence
Enjoy Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD
playback!
Step 1: Set up your speakers
☞ P. 14
Step 2: Connect your Blu-ray Disc/
HD DVD player and other
components
Step 3: Turn on the power and start
playback
☞ P. 16
☞ P. 17
Preparation: Check the items
Quick start guide
14 En
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit.
For other speaker configurations
If you want to connect less than 11 speakers and 2 subwoofers, connect the speakers as follows.
Step 1: Set up your speakers
Front left
Front
right
Center
Surround
left
Surround
right
Surround
back left
Surround
back right
Front
presence
left
Front
presence
right
Rear
presence
left
Rear
presence
right
Subwoofer
left
Subwoofer
right
11.2/11.1
9.2/9.1
7.2/7.1
6.2/6.1
5.2/5.1
3.2/3.1
2.2/2.1
12 3 4
12 3 4
1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofers are unplugged from the AC wall
outlets.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables together to prevent short circuits.
3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.
4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal part of this unit.
Surround right
speaker
Surround back
right speaker
Front right
speaker
Center speaker
Loosen Insert Tighten
Right front
presence speaker
Right rear
presence speaker
Quick start guide
15 En
Introduction
0
0
Surround left
speaker
Front left speaker
Right subwooferLeft subwoofer
Surround back
left speaker
Left rear
presence speaker
Left front
presence speaker
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel
(R), “+” (red line) and “–” (white line) properly.
Check the impedance of the speaker you are connecting. If
the impedance of your speaker is 6-ohm, change the setting of
“SPEAKER IMP.” in “Advanced setup” (see page 119).
Note
Subwoofer cable
Subwoofer
cable
Quick start guide
16 En
1 Connect an HDMI cable to the HDMI output jack on
your Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player and the BD/HD DVD
HDMI IN 1 jack of this unit.
2 Connect an HDMI cable to the HDMI OUT 1 jack on
this unit and the HDMI input jack on your video
monitor.
3 Connect the supplied power cable to AC IN on this
unit and then plug the power cable and other
components into the AC wall outlet.
y
This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET(S) that provide(s) power to
other components. See page 38 for details.
Step 2: Connect your Blu-ray Disc/HD
DVD player and other
components
AC IN
HDMI
OUT 1
BD/HD DVD
IN1
Make sure that this unit and the Blu-ray Disc/HD
DVD player are unplugged from the AC wall
outlets.
BD/HD DVD HDMI IN 1
AC IN
HDMI OUT 1
HDMI output jack
HDMI cable
BD/HD DVD
HDMI IN 1 jack
Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player
AV amplifier
HDMI input
jack
HDMI cable
HDMI OUT 1 jack
Video monitor
AV amplifier
General connection information
• General information on jacks and cable plugs ☞ P. 28
• General information on HDMI ☞ P. 28
• Speaker impedance setting ☞ P. 39
For further connections
• Using other kinds of speaker combinations ☞ P. 21
• Connecting a video monitor via various ways of connection
☞ P. 30
• Connecting a Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player via various ways
of connection ☞ P. 31
• Connecting a DVD player via various ways of connection
☞ P. 32
• Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital video recorder
☞ P. 33
• Connecting a set-top box ☞ P. 32
• Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder, or a turntable
☞ P. 34
• Connecting an external amplifier ☞ P. 35
• Connecting a DVD player via multi-channel analog audio
connection ☞ P. 35
• Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock ☞ P. 36
• Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ☞ P. 36
• Using the TRIGGER OUT jacks ☞ P. 36
• Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel ☞ P. 38
• Connecting this unit to your network ☞ P. 37
• Connecting a USB device ☞ P. 37
To the AC wall outlet
Quick start guide
17 En
Introduction
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit.
2 Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON
position on the front panel.
After this unit is turned on, it takes approximately 20 seconds until this
unit produces sounds, and while “Please wait” appears in the front
panel display, this unit does not accepts the front panel operations and
stores the remote control operations. This unit performs the stored
remote control operations after “Please wait” disappears.
3 Rotate the
D
INPUT selector to set the input source
to “BD/HD DVD”.
y
The recommended sound field program is set for each input source
(BD/HD DVD, etc.). You can also use various sound field programs
and other sound modes for playback. Refer to the following pages for
details:
– see pages 60 and 72 to use various sound field programs
– see page 60 to turn on or off the sound effect
– see page 61 to use the pure direct mode for high fidelity sound
4 Start playback of the desired Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD
source on your player.
5 Rotate
E
VOLUME to adjust the volume.
■ After using this unit...
Press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to the
standby mode.
This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small amount
of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control. To turn on this unit from the standby mode, press
A
MAIN
ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or
E
POWER on the remote
control). See page 39 for details.
■ Are you enjoying playback?
If there are some troubles with playback, check the settings as
follows.
No sound is output.
Are the speakers connected correctly?
 Check the speaker connection.
Are Your Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player connected correctly?
 Check the connection of the Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player.
Are the front speakers selected correctly?
 Press GSPEAKERS A or GSPEAKERS B.
Is volume setting correct?
 Adjust the volume level.
Does the Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player play back correctly?
 Check the setting of the Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player.
No picture.
Is the video monitor connected correctly?
 Check the connection of the video monitor.
If the video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack of
this unit, is the “HDMI OUT SEL” setting correct?
 Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then press
CHDMI OUT repeatedly to set “HDMI OUT SEL” to
“OUT 1”.
Is Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player connected correctly?
 Check the connection of the video monitor.
Is the input source setting of the video monitor correct?
 Check the setting of the input source of the video monitor.
Any other troubles?
Refer to “Troubleshooting” on pages 122 to 127 for other
troubles.
Step 3: Turn on the power and start
playback
Check the type of the connected speakers.
If the speakers are 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER IMP.” to
“6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 119).
Note
Automatic setup feature
To optimize the speaker settings for your listening room, use the
automatic setup feature. See pages 43 to 48 for details.
Quick start guide
18 En
What do you want to do with this unit?
Using various input sources
• Basic operations of this unit ☞ P. 50
• Using your iPod with this unit ☞ P. 64
• Enjoying the contents stored on your PC ☞ P. 66
• Enjoying Internet radio programs and Podcasts ☞ P. 69
• Using USB devices with this unit ☞ P. 69
Using various sound features
• Using various sound field programs ☞ P. 54
• Using the Pure Direct mode for high fidelity sound ☞ P. 61
• Adjusting the tonal quality of the speakers ☞ P. 61
• Customizing the sound field programs ☞ P. 72
Additional features
• Setting the remote control ☞ P. 102
• Displaying the current input source signal information in the
GUI ☞ P. 95
• Saving and recalling the system settings of this unit
(System Memory) ☞ P. 96
• Controlling this unit using a Web browser ☞ P. 101
• Using headphones ☞ P. 51
• Using this unit in multiple rooms simultaneously
(multi-zone configuration) ☞ P. 111
• Automatically turning off this unit ☞ P. 52
Manually adjusting various parameters of
this unit
• Setting the language of the GUI menu ☞ P. 95
• Assigning the input/output jacks on this unit
☞ P. 81
• Setting the parameters for each input source
☞ P. 81
• Setting the parameters related to the volume level
☞ P. 86
• Adjusting the tonal quality of each channel manually by using
the parametric equalizer ☞ P. 87
• Adjusting the audio and video synchronization ☞ P. 88
• Muting the selected speaker channel ☞ P. 89
• Setting the parameters related to the video signals
☞ P. 89
• Setting the basic speaker configuration ☞ P. 83
• Setting the network parameters ☞ P. 92
• Setting the parameters of the multi-zone feature ☞ P. 92
• Protecting the various settings ☞ P. 94
Adjusting the advanced parameters
• Setting the speaker impedance of the connected speakers
☞ P. 119
• Setting the language of the GUI menu ☞ P. 120
• Setting the video format of the connected video monitor
☞ P. 120
• Setting the parameters of this unit to default values
☞ P. 127
Preparation
Connections ......................................................................................... 20
Rear panel .......................................................................................................................... 20
Placing speakers ................................................................................................................. 21
Connecting speakers .......................................................................................................... 23
Using subwoofers .............................................................................................................. 25
Using presence speakers .................................................................................................... 26
Connecting the speaker cable ............................................................................................ 27
Information on jacks and cable plugs ................................................................................ 28
Information on HDMI™ .................................................................................................... 28
Audio and video signal flow .............................................................................................. 29
Connecting a TV monitor or projector .............................................................................. 30
Connecting other components ........................................................................................... 31
Connecting the network ..................................................................................................... 37
Connecting the USB storage devices to the USB ports ..................................................... 37
Connecting the power cable ............................................................................................... 38
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .............................................................. 38
Setting the speaker impedance and language .................................................................... 39
Turning this unit on and off ............................................................................................... 39
Front panel display ............................................................................................................ 40
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)........42
Before starting the automatic setup ................................................................................... 42
Using the quick automatic setup ........................................................................................ 43
Using the basic automatic setup ........................................................................................ 44
Using advanced automatic setup ....................................................................................... 46
Preparation
Connections
20 En
2 RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult
your dealer for details.
Connections
Rear panel
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL OUTDOCK
ZONE OUTVIDEO OUTVIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
MULTI CH INPUT
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
REMOTE
AUDIO OUT AUDIO INAUDIO IN
HDMI
NETWORK
USB
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
ZONE
DVR
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
VCRVCR DVR
VCR CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R CD TUNER
PHONO
MD/TAPE
DVR
DVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
FRONT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SURROUNDSB (8CH)
1
2
1
2
OUT 2OUT 1
BD/HD DVD
CD-R
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
CENTER
EXTRA SP
DVR
CBL/SAT
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
A
B
C
D
1 2 3 4 5 4 5
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
VCRDVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
1 2 3 4 5 45
+ +
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
1
8
2 3 4 5 6
7 9 0 A B C 1
Name Page
1 Speaker terminals
23
3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
28 – 33
Video component jacks
28 – 33
Zone video out jacks
114
DOCK terminal
36
4 USB port
37
5 NETWORK port
37
6 HDMI jacks
28
7 TRIGGER OUT jack
36
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
36
8 COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks
30
9 AC OUTLET(S)
38
0 VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
12
A MULTI CH INPUT jacks
35
ZONE OUT jacks
112
PRE OUT jacks
35
B AC IN
38
C Audio component jacks
34
Digital audio jacks
31
ZONE DIGITAL OUT jack
113
Connections
21 En
Preparation
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy the CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio
sources.
■ 11.2/11.1 -channel speaker layout
11.2/11.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended for playback the sound of high definition audio formats (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD
Master Audio, etc.) as well as the conventional audio sources with sound field programs. See page 23 for connection information.
Front left and right speakers
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position.
The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can
do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.
Surround left and right speakers
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.
Surround back left and right speakers
The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.
Front and rear presence left and right speakers
See page 26 for details.
Left and right subwoofers
See page 25 for details.
Placing speakers
FR
FL
SBR
SBL
RPL
FPL
FPR
RPR
SL
SR
RSW
LSW
C
60˚
30˚
SBR
SBL
RPRRPL
FPRFPL
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
Speaker indications
FL/FR: Front left/right
C:Center
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right
FPL/FPR: Front presence left/right
RPL/RPR: Rear presence left/right
LSW/RSW: Left/right subwoofer
30 cm (12 in) or more
Using di-pole speakers
It is recommended that you use di-pole speakers for surround left
and right channels for the accurate playback with the THX
surround modes. When you use di-pole speakers, place the
surround and surround back speakers as below. Set the distance
between surround back speakers rather narrow compared with the
conventional speaker layout.
FL
SR
SL
FR
C
SBR
SBL
: Di-pole speaker
: Direction of the di-pole speaker phase
Connections
22 En
■ 7.2/7.1 (or 6.2/6.1) -channel speaker layout
See page 23 for connection information.
Front left and right speakers
Center speaker
Surround left and right speakers
The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as those for
the 11.2/11.1-channel speaker layout (see page 21).
Surround back left and right speakers
The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and
provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.
If you use a single surround back speaker, connect the single
surround back speaker to the SUR.BACK/BI-AMP (SINGLE)
speaker terminal and place the speaker behind the listening position.
The surround back left and right channel signals are mixed down
and output at the single surround back speaker when you set
“Surround Back” to “Small x1” or “Large x1” (see page 84).
Subwoofer
See page 25 for details.
y
You can also use the front presence speakers (see page 26) instead of the
surround back speakers.
■ 5.2/5.1 -channel speaker layout
See page 23 for connection information.
Front left and right speakers
Center speaker
Subwoofer
The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as those for
the 11.2/11.1-channel speaker layout (see page 21).
Surround left and right speakers
Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND speaker
terminals even if you place the surround speakers behind the
listening position. For the smooth and unbroken sound field behind
the listening position, place the surround left and right speakers
farther back compared with the placement in the 11.2/11.1-channel
speaker layout. The surround back channel signals are directed to
the surround left and right speakers when “Surround Back” is set to
“None” (see page 84).
Subwoofer
See page 25 for details.
FR
FL
SBR
SBL
SL
SR
C
RSW
LSW
Speaker indications
FL/FR: Front left/right
C:Center
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SBL/SBR: Surround back
left/right
LSW/RSW: Left/right subwoofer
60˚
30˚
SBR
SBL
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
30 cm (12 in) or more
FR
FL
SL
SR
RSW
LSW
C
60˚
30˚
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
Speaker indications
FL/FR: Front left/right
C:Center
SL/SR: Surround left/right
LSW/RSW: Left/right subwoofer
For other speaker combinations
You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field programs by using a speaker combination other than the speaker combinations
shown above.
Use the automatic setup feature (see page 42) or set the “Speaker Set” parameters in “Manual Setup” (see page 84) to output the surround
sounds at the connected speakers.
Connections
23 En
Preparation
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red line) and “–” (white line) properly. If the connections are faulty, this unit
cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.
• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.
Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red line) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (white line)
terminals.
• You can use the REAR ZONE/PRESENCE, FRONT ZONE/PRESENCE, and/or EXTRA SP speaker terminals for the Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4
speakers (see page 116). You can also use all speaker terminals on this unit for the Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4 speakers (see page 120).
■ For the 11.2/11.1 (or 9.2/9.1) -channel speaker setting
Connecting speakers
Caution
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 39).
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/
or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the
monitor.
• If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, be sure to set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 39).
Notes
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL OUTDOCK
ZONE OUTVIDEO OUTVIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
MULTI CH INPUT
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
REMOTE
AUDIO OUT AUDIO INAUDIO IN
HDMI
NETWORK
USB
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
ZONE
DVR
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
VCRVCR DVR
VCR CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R CD TUNER
PHONO
MD/TAPE
DVR
DVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SURROUNDSB (8CH)
1
2
+12v
15mA MAX.
1
2
OUT 2OUT 1
BD/HD DVD
CD-R
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
CENTER
EXTRA SP
DVR
CBL/SAT
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
A
B
C
D
1 2 3 4 5 4 5
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
VCRDVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
1 2 3 4 5 45
+ +
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
Surround right
speaker
Center speaker
Right rear
presence
speaker
FRONT B speakers
Right front
presence
speaker
Left front
presence
speaker
Left rear
presence
speaker
Surround back
right speaker
Front right
speaker
Front left
speaker
Surround back
left speaker
Surround left
speaker
Connections
24 En
■ For the 7.2/7.1 (or 6.2/6.1) -channel speaker setting
* If you use a single surround back speaker, connect the speaker to the SUR.BACK/BI-AMP (SINGLE) speaker terminal.
■ For the 5.2/5.1 -channel speaker setting
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
MULTI CH INPUT
TRIGGER
OUT
REMOTE
DIGITAL IN
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
PRPBY
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SURROUNDSB (8CH)
1
2
+12v
15mA MAX.
1
2
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
CENTER
EXTRA SP
DVR
D
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
++
Surround right
speaker
Center speaker
FRONT B speakers
Surround back
right speaker
Front right
speaker
Front left
speaker
Surround back
left speaker *
Surround left
speaker
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
MULTI CH INPUT
OUT
REMOTE
DIGITAL IN
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
PRPBY
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SURROUNDSB (8CH)
1
2
+12v
15mA MAX.
1
2
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
EXTRA SP
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
CENTER
EXTRA SP
DVR
D
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
++
Surround right
speaker
Center speaker
FRONT B speakers
Front right
speaker
Front left
speaker
Surround left
speaker
Connections
25 En
Preparation
The use of subwoofers with built-in amplifiers, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for
reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high fidelity sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel included in digital audio signals. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.
You can use one or two subwoofers and select various positions of the subwoofers.
■ Configuration 1:
Front left and right
Set “Configuration” in “Subwoofer” to
“Stereo” (see page 85).
Speaker indications
FL/FR: Front left/right
C:Center
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right
LSW/RSW: Left/right subwoofer
■ Configuration 2:
Front and rear
Set “Configuration” in “Subwoofer” to
“Front & Rear” (see page 85).
Speaker indications
FL/FR: Front left/right
C:Center
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right
FSW/RSW: Front/rear subwoofer
■ Configuration 3:
A single subwoofer
Set “Configuration” in “Subwoofer” to
“Monaural” (see page 85).
Speaker indications
FL/FR: Front left/right
C:Center
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right
SW: Subwoofer
■ Connecting subwoofers
Using subwoofers
C
LSW
RSW
SL SR
FL FR
SBRSBL
C
RSW
FSW
SL SR
FL FR
SBRSBL
C
SW
SL SR
FL FR
SBRSBL
PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
DIGITAL IN
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
EXTRA SP
R
L
R
Left (or front) subwoofer
Right (or rear) subwoofer
y
If you connect a single subwoofer, connect the subwoofer to the left
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks.
Connections
26 En
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front and surround back speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound
field programs (see page 54). Presence speakers function more effectively when the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode is active (see page 60). You
can adjust the vertical position of dialogues with using the front presence speakers (see page 77).
If “Front Presence” is set to “None”, the rear presence speakers also do not function and you cannot activate the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode.
Front presence speakers
Rear presence speakers
* Place the rear presence left and right speakers so that the distance between the rear presence left and right speakers is same as the distance between front
presence left and right speakers.
Using presence speakers
Note
FR
FPRFPL
C
FL
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
1.8 m
(6 ft) or
higher
Speaker indications
FL: Front left
FR: Front right
C:Center
FPL: Front presence left
FPR: Front presence right
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
1.8 m
(6 ft) or
higher
*
RPLRPR
SBR SBL
SL
SR
1.8 m
(6 ft) or
higher
Speaker indications
SL: Surround left
SR: Surround right
SBL: Surround back left
SBR: Surround back right
RPL: Rear presence left
RPR: Rear presence right
1.8 m
(6 ft) or
higher
*
Connections
27 En
Preparation
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation
from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the
exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short
circuits.
2 Loosen the knob.
3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each
terminal.
4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
■ Connecting the banana plug
(China and General models only)
Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug
connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.
■ Using bi-amplification connections
This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections to one
speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-amplification.
To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT A and
SUR.BACK/BI-AMP terminals as shown below. To activate the bi-
amplification connections, set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in “Advanced
setup” (see page 120).
When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the shorting
bars are put into the terminals of the speakers appropriately. Refer to the
instruction manuals of the speakers for details.
Connecting the speaker cable
10 mm (0.4 in)
Red line: positive (+)
White line: negative (–)
Caution
Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers to separate
the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers.
Note
Red line: positive (+)
White line: negative (–)
banana plug
+
R
+
L
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B/
ZONE
FRONT B/
FRONT A
EXTRA SP
A
B
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B/
ZONE
FRONT A
EXTRA SP
A
B
This unit
LeftRight
Front speakers
Connections
28 En
■ Audio jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the
availability of audio jacks on your other components.
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right
analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white
plugs to the left jacks.
DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables.
DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables.
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS
bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack.
All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connect the video input
jacks on this unit to the video output jacks of the input source
components to switch the audio and video sources simultaneously.
Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite
video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-
video cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (P
B, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of
component video cables.
y
This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See pages 29 and
89 for details.
■ HDMI jack and cable plug
This unit has five HDMI input jacks and two HDMI output jacks for
digital audio and video signal input/output.
y
• We recommend that you use a commercially available HDMI cable shorter
than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack
↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to
other DVI components.
• You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see
page 95).
• See page 139 for the information on the input signal capability of this unit
for the HDMI connection.
• When you set “Standby Through” in “Manual Setup” to “On”, this unit
allows the HDMI signals input at an HDMI IN jack to pass through this
unit and output at an HDMI OUT jack (see page 94).
• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of the HDMI
components connected to the HDMI OUT jacks on this unit while data is
being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise.
• The HDMI OUT jacks output the audio signals input at the HDMI input
jacks only when “Support Audio” is set to “Other” (see page 94).
• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the HDMI
OUT jacks via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to establish the
connection to the component.
• The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and
component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be output at the
HDMI OUT jacks. Set “Conversion” to “On” in “Manual Setup” (see
page 89) to activate this feature.
• This unit is equipped with two HDMI OUT jacks, however cannot output
the video signals to the both HDMI OUT jacks simultaneously. You can
select the active HDMI OUT jack. See page 50 for details.
Information on jacks and cable plugs
Note
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
R
L
C
O
R
L
Left and right analog
audio cable plugs
Optical digital
audio cable plug
Coaxial digital
audio cable plug
Audio jacks and cable plugs
(Red)(White) (Orange)
VIDEO S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y R PB P
PB
Y
P
R
S
V
Composite video
cable plug
S-video cable
plug
Component video
cable plugs
Video jacks and cable plugs
(Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)
Information on HDMI™
HDMI
HDMI cable plug
Notes
Connections
29 En
Preparation
■ Audio signal flow
• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals
input at the HDMI input jacks can be output at the HDMI OUT jacks only
when “Support Audio” is set to “Other” (see page 94).
• The following types of audio signals can be only input at HDMI input
jacks:
–DSD
–Dolby TrueHD
– Dolby Digital Plus
– DTS-HD Master Audio
– DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
■ Video signal flow
y
You can deinterlace and convert the resolution of the video signals by using
“Video” parameters. See page 89 for details.
• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S
VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as
follows:
1. COMPONENT VIDEO
2. S VIDEO
3. VIDEO
• This unit is equipped with the two COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT jacks and HDMI OUT jacks. The COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 1 and 2 outputs the same video signals and you can use
both COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks simultaneously.
• Digital video signals input at the HDMI input jacks cannot be output from
analog video output jacks.
• The analog component video signals (with 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of
resolution only) are converted to the S-video or composite video signals
and output at the VIDEO or S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• The GUI signal is not output at the DVR OUT and
VCR OUT jacks and is not recorded.
Audio and video signal flow
Notes
DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL)
DIGITAL AUDIO
(COAXIAL)
HDMI
AUDIO
OutputInput
Notes
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
Through
OutputInput
“Conversion”: “On” (see page 89)
Connections
30 En
Connect your TV (or projector) to one of the HDMI OUT jacks, the
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this
unit.
y
You can select to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another
HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jacks on the rear panel of
this unit. Use the “Support Audio” parameter in “Option” to select the
component to play back HDMI audio signals (see page 94).
• This unit is equipped with two HDMI OUT jacks, however cannot output
the video signals to the both HDMI OUT jacks simultaneously. You can
select the active HDMI OUT jack. Set the operation mode selector to
FAMP and then press CHDMI OUT repeatedly.
• If you connect a video monitor or projector to one of the HDMI OUT jack,
connect the component to the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to
recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they are in the
standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.
• The GUI menu is not overlaid on the input video image depending on the
input video signal format and the setting of the parameters in “Wall Paper”
(see page 91). In this case, the GUI menu appears with the wall paper or
gray background.
• If the connected video monitor is compatible with the automatic audio and
video synchronization feature (automatic lip sync feature), this unit adjusts
the audio and video timing automatically (see page 88). Connect the video
monitor to the HDMI OUT jacks on this unit to use the feature.
Connecting a TV monitor or projector
Make sure that this unit and other components
are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
Notes
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL OUTDOCK
ZONE OUTVIDEO OUTVIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
MULTI CH INPUT
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
REMOTE
AUDIO OUT AUDIO INAUDIO IN
HDMI
NETWORK
USB
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
ZONE
DVR
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
VCRVCR DVR
VCR CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R CD TUNER
PHONO
MD/TAPE
DVR
DVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SURROUNDSB (8CH)
1
2
+12v
15mA MAX.
1
2
OUT 2OUT 1
BD/HD DVD
CD-R
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
CENTER
EXTRA SP
DVR
CBL/SAT
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
A
B
C
D
1 2 3 4 5 4 5
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
VCRDVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
1 2 3 4 5 45
+ +
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
PRPB
V
S
Y
PR
PB
Y
TV
Video in
Component video in
HDMI in
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
Projector
S-video in
HDMI in
Component video in
Connections
31 En
Preparation
• When “Conversion” is set to “Off” (see page 89), be sure to make the same
type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 30). For
example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack
on this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks.
• When “Conversion” is set to “On” (see page 89), the converted video
signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a
source, you must make the same type of video connections between each
component.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default
component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack, select the corresponding setting for “Optical Input”, “Optical
Output”, or “Coaxial Input” in “I/O Assignment” (see page 81).
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL)
and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is given to the
signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
■ Connecting a Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD player
Connect your Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD player to the HDMI IN1 jack on this unit to perform the features of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD
completely.
Connecting other components
Notes
Make sure that this unit and other components
are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL OUTDOCK
ZONE OUTVIDEO OUTVIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
MULTI CH INPUT
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
REMOTE
AUDIO OUT AUDIO INAUDIO IN
HDMI
NETWORK
USB
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
ZONE
DVR
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
VCRVCR DVR
VCR CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R CD TUNER
PHONO
MD/TAPE
DVR
DVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SURROUNDSB (8CH)
1
2
+12v
15mA MAX.
1
2
OUT 2OUT 1
BD/HD DVD
CD-R
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
CENTER
EXTRA SP
DVR
CBL/SAT
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
A
B
C
D
1 2 3 4 5 45
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
VCRDVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
1 2 3 4 5 45
+ +
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
PRPBY
C
Blu-ray Disc or
HD DVD player
HDMI out
Component out Coaxial out
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
Connections
32 En
■ Connecting a DVD player
■ Connecting set-top boxes
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL OUTDOCK
ZONE OUTVIDEO OUTVIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
MULTI CH INPUT
-
232C
IGGER
O
UT
M
OTE
AUDIO OUT AUDIO INAUDIO IN
HDMI
NETWORK
USB
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
ZONE
DVR
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
VCRVCR DVR
VCR CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R CD TUNER
PHONO
MD/TAPE
DVR
DVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
1
2
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SURROUNDSB (8CH)
v
A
MAX.
OUT 2OUT 1
BD/HD DVD
CD-R
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
DVR
CBL/SAT
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
A
B
C
D
1 2 3 4 5 4 5
IN1
IN2 IN3 IN4
VCRDVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
1 2 3 4 5 45
+
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
L
L R
C
O
V
S
PRPBY
DVD player
HDMI out
Coaxial out
Component out
S-video out
Video out
Audio out
Optical out
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL OUTDOCK
ZONE OUTVIDEO OUTVIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
MULTI CH INPUT
C
R
E
AUDIO OUT AUDIO INAUDIO IN
HDMI
NETWORK
USB
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
ZONE
DVR
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
VCRVCR DVR
VCR CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R CD TUNER
PHONO
MD/TAPE
DVR
DVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
1
2
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SURROUNDSB (8CH)
A
X.
OUT 2OUT 1
BD/HD DVD
CD-R
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
DVR
CBL/SAT
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
A
B
C
D
1
23 4 5 4 5
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
VCRDVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
1 2 3 4 5 45
+
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
L
L R
O
V
S
PRPBY
LR
C
V
S
Satellite receiver
or cable TV receiver
Coaxial out
Component out
Video out
Audio out
S-video out
Optical out
Audio out
Video out
S-video out
HDMI out
HDTV decoder
Connections
33 En
Preparation
■ Connecting a DVD recorder
■ Connecting a VCR
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL OUTDOCK
ZONE OUTVIDEO OUTVIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
MULTI CH INPUT
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
REMOTE
AUDIO OUT AUDIO INAUDIO IN
HDMI
NETWORK
USB
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
ZONE
DVR
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
VCRVCR DVR
VCR CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R CD TUNER
PHONO
MD/TAPE
DVR
DVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SURROUNDSB (8CH)
1
2
+12v
15mA MAX.
1
2
OUT 2OUT 1
BD/HD DVD
CD-R
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
CENTER
EXTRA SP
DVR
CBL/SAT
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
A
B
C
D
1 23 4 5 4 5
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
VCRDVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
1 23 4 5 4 5
+ +
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
L R
V V
S S
PRPBY
L R
O
DVD recorder
Optical out
S-video in
Video in
Audio in
Video out
Audio out
HDMI out
Component out
S-video out
D
ZONE OUTVIDEO OUTVIDEO IN
AUDIO OUT AUDIO INAUDIO IN
HDMI
T
WORK
PRPBY
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
VCRVCR DVR
VCR CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R CD TUNER
MD/TAPE
DVR
DVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
OUT 2OUT 1
BD/HD DVD
1 2 345 4 5
IN1 IN2 IN3
VCRDVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
1 2 345 4 5
L
R
L
V
L R
V
L R
SS
VCR
S-video in
Video in
Audio out
Video out
S-video out
Audio in
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
Connections
34 En
■ Connecting audio components
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal on this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND
terminal for some turntables.
• The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge
to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier.
• When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component, the priority is given to
the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
Notes
DIGITAL OUTDOCK
ZONE OUTVIDEO OUT
PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
ZONE
DVR
PRPBY
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
VCR
R
VCR CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R CD TUNER
PHONO
MD/TAPE
R
MONITOR
OUT
SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
E
4
BD/HD
DVD
CD-R
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
5
R
L
R
L
L R L R
L R
L RL R L R
C
O
O
L R
CD recorder
Turntable
Tuner
MD recorder or
tape deck
Optical in
Audio out
Audio out
Ground
Audio in
Coaxial out
Audio out
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
Optical out
Audio in
Audio out
CD player
Audio out
Connections
35 En
Preparation
■ Connecting external amplifiers
This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However,
if you want to use external amplifiers, connect the external
amplifiers to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT jack outputs the
same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
y
Use the external amplifiers in the following cases:
– when you want to add more power to the speaker output
– when you want to use another amplifier for your presence of sounds
– when you want to enjoy the 11.2-channel surround sound in the main
zone with activating the other zones (see page 111)
* When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back
channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack.
■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external
decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right
FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-
format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.
If you set “Input Channels” to “8ch” in “Multi CH Assign” (see
page 83), you can use the input jacks assigned as “Front Input” in
“Multi CH Assign” (see page 83) together with the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external
decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left
and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and
surround channels.
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks as the input source (see page 50), this unit automatically turns off the
digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.
• The audio signals input at the CENTER and SUBWOOFER MULTI CH
INPUT jacks are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels.
• This unit redirects the audio signals input at the CENTER and/or
SUBWOOFER MULTI CH INPUT jacks to the front left and right speaker
channels when you set “Center” and/or “Configuration” in “Speaker Set”
to “None” (see page 84). We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-
channel speaker system before using this feature.
For 6-channel input
For 8-channel input
* The analog audio input jacks assigned as “Front Input” in “Multi CH
Assign” (see page 83).
Pre-amplifier mode
If you want use the external amplifiers for the all channels in the
main zone, set “PREAMP MODE” to “ON” in the advanced
setup (see page 120). When “PREAMP MODE” is set to “ON”,
the power consumption is reduced.
PRE OUT jack Output audio channel
1 FRONT
Front left/right
2 SURROUND
Surround left/right
3 SUBWOOFER
Subwoofer left/right (see page 25)
4 SUR.BACK
Surround back left/right *
5 FRONT PRESENCE
Front presence left/right
6 REAR PRESENCE
Rear presence left/right
7 CENTER
Center
Note
PRE OUT
SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
R
L
12 3
7
456
Notes
Note
MULTI CH INPUT
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFERSURROUNDSB (8CH)
R
L
LR L R
Subwoofer out
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Center out
Surround out
Front out
MULTI CH INPUT
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFERSURROUNDSB (8CH)
R
L
R
L
LR L R L R
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Surround back out
Subwoofer out
Center out
Surround out
*
Front out
Connections
36 En
■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that
allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the
YDS-10, sold separately) where you can station your iPod and
control playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.
Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold
separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit
using its dedicated cable.
■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
When the components have the capability of the transmission of the
remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE
OUT jacks to the remote control input and output jacks with the
monaural analog mini cable as follows.
* You can connect another set of infrared signal receiver and Yamaha
component to the REMOTE IN 2 and OUT 2 jacks same as the REMOTE
IN 1 and OUT 1 jacks.
■ Using the TRIGGER OUT jacks
This unit can control the components (for example, the electric
screen, projector, etc.) corresponding to the selected input source
and activating/deactivating the desired zone. This unit sends the 12
V/15 mA direct electric current at the TRIGGER OUT jacks
according to the settings of “Trigger Output” in “Manual Setup”
(see page 94). Connect one of the TRIGGER OUT jack on this unit
and the trigger input jack (or control input jack) of the components
with the monaural analog mini cable as follows.
* You can connect another component to the TRIGGER OUT 2 jack
same as the TRIGGER OUT 1 jack.
The function when you use this feature with the components may vary
depending on the components. Refer to the instruction manuals of the
connected components.
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL OUTDOCK
GND
COAXIAL
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
ZONE
DVR
TUNER
PHONO
C
E
REAR
PRESENCE
CD-R
DVD
DVR
CD
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
BD/
HD DVD
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
IN4
+
R
L
R
L
L
Yamaha iPod universal dock
(such as the YDS-10,
sold separately)
REMOTE
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
1
2
Controlled component
(CD or DVD player, etc.)
*
Remote
control in
Remote
control out
Infrared signal receiver
or controlling
component
Note
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
Electric screen,
projector, etc.
*
Connections
37 En
Preparation
To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the NETWORK port on this unit,
and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server
function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this unit is connected to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To
enjoy music files saved on your PC and Yamaha MCX-2000, access the Internet Radio, or control this unit by using your PC, each device
must be connected properly in the network.
• You must use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable (commercially available) to connect a network hub or router and this unit.
• If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (see page 92).
• Yamaha MCX-2000, MCX-A10 and MCX-C15 may not be for sale in same locations.
This unit is equipped with both the front and rear USB ports. Connect the USB storage device (for example, a high capacity USB hard disk
drive) to the front or rear USB port on this unit. Set “USB Select” in “Input Select” to “Front” or “Rear” to select the active USB port (see
page 83). The initial setting of “USB Select” is “Front”. The initial setting of “USB Select” is “Front”.
• We do not guarantee the power supply and operation of all the connected USB devices.
• See page 69 for more information about the USB storage devices that this unit is supported to.
Connecting the network
Notes
NETWORK
LAN
WAN
Router
PC
Modem
Yamaha MCX-2000
Internet
Yamaha MCX-C15
Yamaha MCX-A10
(with optional
speakers)
Network cable
Connecting the USB storage devices to the USB ports
Notes
USB
USB storage device
TONE CONTROL
T
/
2
PUSH ENTER
L
HDMI IN USB
USB storage device or USB
portable audio player
(Rear panel)
(Front panel)
Connections
38 En
■ Connecting the AC power cable
Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet (AC IN) after all
other connections are complete, and then plug the AC power cable
into an AC wall outlet.
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. model ............................................................ 1 outlet
Korea model .............................................................. None
Other models .........................................................2 outlets
Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components.
Connect the power cable of your other components to these
outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when this unit is
turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when this
unit is turned off. For information on the maximum power or the
total power consumption of the components that can be connected
to these outlet(s), see “Specifications” on page 138.
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game
console or a video camera to this unit.
Connecting the power cable
AC IN
To the AC wall outlet
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front
panel
Caution
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components
before making connections.
MASTER
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
MIC
OPTIMIZER
AUDIO
SELECT
SPEAKERS
AB
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
ON/OFF
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MULTI
ZONE
STRAIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
MENU
TONE CONTROL
ZONE
CONTROLS
REC OUT/
ZONE 2
EFFECT
PUSH ENTER
PROGRAM
RL
OPTICAL
HDMI IN USB
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 3 ZONE 4
ZONE 2
RL
OPTICAL
AUDIO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
HDMI IN
O
V
S
L
R
Game console or
video camera
Optical output
Video output
S-Video output
Audio output
HDMI output
Recommended
Alternative
Connections
39 En
Preparation
Before using this unit, set the speaker impedance of the connected
speakers and the language of the menu items and messages.
1 Make sure this unit is turned off.
2 Press and hold
I
PROGRAM on the front panel and
then press
B
MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON
position to turn on this unit.
Press and hold IPROGRAM until “ADVANCED SETUP”
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate
I
PROGRAM to select “SPEAKER IMP.”.
4 Press
I
PROGRAM repeatedly to select “8ΩMIN” or
“6ΩMIN”.
5 Rotate
I
PROGRAM to select “LANGUAGE”.
6 Press
I
PROGRAM repeatedly to select the desired
language setting.
Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE (Japanese),
FRENCH (French), GERMAN (German), SPANISH
(Spanish), RUSSIAN (Russian)
• You can also select the language setting by using GUI menu. See page 95
for details.
• Some languages are not displayed in the front panel display or Zone OSD.
··· The selected language is displayed.
— ··· The selected language is not displayed. The menu items and
messages are displayed in English.
7 Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to
the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off
this unit.
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
■ Turning on this unit
Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward to
the ON position to turn on this unit.
When you turn on this unit by pressing
B
MASTER ON/OFF, the
main zone is turned on.
After this unit is turned on, it takes approximately 20 seconds until this unit
produces sounds, and while “Please wait” appears in the front panel display,
this unit does not accepts the front panel operations and stores the remote
control operations. This unit performs the stored remote control operations
after “Please wait” disappears.
■ Turning off this unit
Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit.
•
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as
E
POWER and
D
STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when
B
MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.
• Basically, we recommend that you use the standby mode to turn off this
unit.
■ Set the main zone to the standby mode
Press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
(or
D
STANDBY
) to set
the main zone to the standby mode.
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in
order to receive infrared signals from the remote control.
■ Turning on the main zone from the standby
mode
Press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or
E
POWER) to turn on
the main zone.
y
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few seconds before
this unit can reproduce sound.
• These buttons are operational only when
B
MASTER ON/OFF is pressed
inward to the ON position.
Setting the speaker impedance and
language
Caution
If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER IMP.” to
“6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit.
Notes
LANGUAGE GUI menu
Front panel
display
Zone OSD
RUSSIAN
—
JAPANESE
——
Other languages
PUSH ENTER
PROGRAM
MASTER
While holding
down
ADVANCED SETUP
Turning this unit on and off
Note
Notes
If there are some problems...
• First, turn off and then turn on this unit again.
• If problems persist, initialize the parameters of this unit. See
page 127 for details.
Connections
40 En
1 RECOUT indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the recording input source selecting
mode (see page 62).
2 HDMI indicator
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at one
of the HDMI input jacks (see page 28).
HDMI indicator also lights up when “Standby Through” is set to
“On” and this unit is in the standby mode (see page 94).
3 Front/rear USB port indicator
Lights up according to the setting of “USB Select” (see page 83).
F: Front USB port is selected.
R: Rear USB port is selected.
4 Battery charge indicator
Lights up when this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod in
the standby mode of this unit (see page 64).
5 Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected
input source.
NET indicator also lights up when “NET STANDBY” in “Advanced setup”
is set to “YES” and this unit is in the standby mode (see page 119).
6 Sound field indicators
Light up to indicate the active sound fields (see page 54).
7 Input signal indicators
The respective indicator lights up when this unit is reproducing
DSD (Direct Stream Digital), PCM (Pulse Code Modulation),
WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3), or
AAC (MPEG-4 AAC) audio signals.
8 SP A B indicators
Lights up according to the set of front speakers activated (see
page 51).
SP A: The FRONT A speakers are activated.
SP B: The FRONT B speakers are activated.
SP A B: The FRONT A and B speakers are activated.
9 Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 51).
0 Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
A Decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this
unit function.
B DSP indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound field
programs are selected.
CINEMA DSP HD indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound
field program (see page 54).
HD³ indicator
Lights up when the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode is active (see
page 60).
C VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is active (see
page 60).
Front panel display
A B
SP
RECOUT
MASTER AUDIO
MATRIX
DISCRETE
PRE AMP
HD
3
VIRTUAL SILENT
CINEMA
YPAO ENHANCER
HD
96
24
VOLUME
SLEEP
ZONE2
ZONE3
ZONE4
q
PL x
q
DIGITAL PLUS
q
TRUE HD
q
EX
dB
t
C RL
LFE
SRSL
FPR
SB
SBRSBL
RPR
AAC
DSD
PCM
MP3
WMA
TUNERMULTI CHPHONOCDCD-RDVDDTVDVRVCR
MD
TAPE
BD
HD DVD
CBL
SAT
V-AUX
DOCK
NET
USB
F R
H
I
A
F
G
B
C
D
E
J
K
12 3 4 5 6
0
7 8 9
VOLUME
SLEEP
ZONE2
ZONE3
ZONE4
dB
C RL
LFE
SRSL
FPR
SB
SBRSBL
RPR
MASTER AUDIO
MATRIX
DISCRETE
PRE AMP
HD
3
VIRTUAL
SILENT
CINEMA
YPAO ENHANCER
HD
96
24
q
PL x
q
DIGITAL PLUS
q
TRUE HD
q
EX
t
Note
Connections
41 En
Preparation
D YPAO indicator
Lights up when you run “Auto Setup” and when the speaker
settings set in “Auto Setup” are used without any modifications (see
page 42).
E ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is selected
(see page 59).
F PRE AMP indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the pre-amplifier mode (see
page 120).
G SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field
program is selected (see page 60).
H SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 52).
I VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the current volume level.
y
When the audio output is muted, the VOLUME level indicator flashes (see
page 50).
J Input channel and speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
• Indicate the channel components of the current digital input
signal.
• Light up or flash according to the settings of the speakers
when this unit is in the auto setup procedure (see page 42) or
the speaker level setting procedure in the “Speaker Level”
(see page 86).
Presence speaker indicators
Light up according to setting for “Front Presence” and “Rear
Presence” (see page 84) in “Speaker Set” when this unit is in the
auto setup procedure (see page 42) or the speaker level setting
procedure in the “Speaker Level” (see page 86).
y
You can make settings for the presence and surround back speakers
automatically by running “Auto Setup” (see page 42) or manually by
adjusting settings for “Front Presence”, “Rear Presence” (see page 84),
and “Surround Back” (see page 84) in “Speaker Set”.
K ZONE2/ZONE3/ZONE4 indicators
Lights up when Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 is turned on
(see page 111).
Presence speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
C RL
LFE
SRSL
FPR
SB
SBRSBL
RPR
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
42 En
This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based
speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and this unit
analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment.
This unit is equipped with various automatic setup features. You can
select the automatic setup features according to your preference.
• Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may notice irregular
results when setting the level and/or distance of the main speakers. If this
happens, THX Ltd. recommends setting them manually.
• Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and the
interaction with the room, THX Ltd. recommends setting the level and the
distance of the subwoofer manually.
Make sure of the following check points before starting the
automatic setup operations.
❏ Speakers are connected appropriately.
❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
❏ This unit is turned on.
❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume
level is set to about half way (or slightly less).
❏ The crossover frequency controls of the connected
subwoofer is set to the maximum.
❏ If you use the external amplifiers (see page 35), the
amplifiers are turned on and the settings are appropriate.
❏ The room is sufficiently quiet.
❏ Set the operation mode selector on the remote control to
FAMP.
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the
automatic setup procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible
while the automatic setup procedure is in progress. If there is too much
ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
Notes
Advanced automatic setup
Use this feature to make fine-adjustments of the sound. You
can optimize the setup of this unit for multiple listening
positions in a listening room, and/or for the effect of the sound
field programs.
☞ P. 46
Basic automatic setup
Use this feature to customize the automatic setup and review
the result of the measurements. You can set the parameters that
this unit sets in the automatic setup procedure and review the
results of the measurements.
☞ P. 44
Quick automatic setup
Use this feature to carry out the automatic setup quickly. You
can optimize the basic parameters of the sound in the listening
room automatically.
☞ P. 43
Before starting the automatic setup
Notes
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
MIN MAX
CROSSOVER
HIGH CUT
Controls of a subwoofer (example)
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
43 En
Preparation
Use this feature to optimize the sound of this unit to the listening
room quickly.
1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
“MIC ON” appears in the front panel display.
If “GUI” appears in the front panel display as follows, the menu screen
(GUI) is displayed in the video monitor and you cannot proceed the
quick automatic setup. In such a case, press
J
MENU to turn off the
GUI or use the basic automatic setup procedure (see page 44).
2 Place the optimizer microphone at your normal
listening position on a flat level surface with the
omni-directional microphone heading upward.
y
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer
microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are
seated in your listening position. You can use the attached screw of a
tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone to the tripod (etc.).
3 Press
I
PROGRAM on the front panel to start the
measurements.
This unit starts the measurements immediately. Loud test tones
are output from each speaker during the automatic setup
procedure. During the setup procedure, following messages
appear in the front panel display.
y
To cancel the automatic setup procedure, rotate EVOLUME.
• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation
on this unit.
• Keep quiet when you leave the room. The necessary time for the
automatic setup procedure may differ depending on the environment
of the listening room and connected speakers (from 30 seconds to 5
minutes).
4 Once this unit completes all measurements and
adjustments successfully, following message
appears in the front panel display.
y
You can check the detailed results of the measurements by using the
video monitor. See page 45 for details.
Using the quick automatic setup
Note
MIC
OPTIMIZER
AUDIO
SELECT
SPEAKERS
AB
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
MULTI
ZONE
ZONE ON/OFF
MENU
TONE CONTROL
ZONE
CONTROLS
REC OUT/
ZONE 2
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PUSH ENTER
PROGRAM
R
L
OPTICAL
HDMI IN USB
AUDI O
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 3 ZONE 4
ZONE 2
Omni-directional
microphone
AUTO SETUP
ENTER TO START
GUI
DSP-Z11
Optimizer microphone
Before proceeding next operation
Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the
automatic setup procedure immediately. For more accurate
measurements, we recommend that you move to the wall where
speakers are not around.
Notes
If error or warning message appears...
Error message appears in the front panel display. See the
“Auto Setup” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 126
for a complete list of error messages and proper remedies.
AUTO SETUP
ANALIZING
AUTO SETUP
MEASURING
AUTO SETUP
PREPARING
COMPLETED
PLS UNPLUG MIC
ERROR: E-01
PRESS ENTER
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
44 En
5 Disconnect the optimizer microphone to exit from the
automatic setup mode.
The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away
from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit.
Use this feature to customize the measurements and the settings of
the automatic setup using the connected video monitor.
1 Turn on the connected video monitor.
2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to this
unit and then place the microphone appropriately.
Refer to the steps 1 and 2 of “Using the quick automatic setup”
on page 43.
3 Press IMENU on the remote control.
Following menu screen appears in the video monitor.
4 Press 9k to select “Setup Menu” and then 9h.
The list of the measurements in the automatic setup appears in
the screen.
5 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
measurement item and then press 9ENTER
repeatedly to select whether the selected
measurement is carried out.
Check mark appears in the check box of the measurement that
this unit carries out.
When you use THX speakers, clear the check mark of “Size” and then make
sure that “Small” or “Small x2” are selected in “Speaker Set” (see page 84).
6 Once you have finished the settings, press 9l to
return to the previous menu level and then press 9n
to select “Start”.
7 Press
9
ENTER to start the measurements.
This unit starts the measurements immediately. Loud test tones
are output from each speaker during the automatic setup
procedure.
• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation
on this unit.
• Keep quiet when you leave the room. The necessary time for the
automatic setup procedure may differ depending on the environment
of the listening room and connected speakers (from 30 seconds to 5
minutes).
y
To cancel the automatic setup procedure, press 0RETURN. The error
message “E09:User Cancel” appears in the menu screen and this unit
stops the measurement immediately (see page 45).
Using the basic automatic setup
Information
Setup Menu
Start Start:ENTER
Measurement Descriptions
Multi Measure
(Multiple point
measurement)
You can make adjustments of this unit for multiple
listening positions. For details, refer to “Using advanced
automatic setup” on page 46. In the basic automatic
setup, leave the setting to the default.
Wiring
(Speaker wiring)
This unit checks and adjusts which speakers are
connected and the polarity of each speaker.
Distance
(Speaker
distance)
This unit checks and adjusts the distance of each speaker
from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each
channel.
Size
(Speaker size)
This unit checks and adjusts the frequency response of
each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency
crossover for each channel.
Equalizing
(Speaker
equalizing)
Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified
frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the
crucial frequency bands for the listening room and
adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to
create a cohesive sound field in the room.
Level
(Speaker level)
This unit checks and adjusts the volume level of each
speaker.
Standing Wave
(Standing wave
cancelling)
Standing waves are the sound waves generated in a room
due to the acoustic characteristics of the room and audio
system, etc., and the acoustic standing waves may
interrupt the accurate reproduction of the source sound
and distort the characteristics of the sound produced by
this unit. This unit reduces the effects of the standing
waves in the listening with the specially customized
parametric equalizer.
Angle
(Speaker angle)
For details, refer to “Using advanced automatic setup”
on page 46. In the basic automatic setup, clear the check
mark.
Note
Notes
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
45 En
Preparation
8 Once all measurement items are set successfully,
following display appears in the menu screen.
In this menu, you can perform the following operations:
•Press 9n and select “Setup” to set the measured values.
•Press 9k and select “Retry” to retry the automatic setup
procedure. This unit starts the automatic setup procedure
immediately again.
•Press 9h and select “Detail” to view information about
measurement results and warning messages. In the
information display, press 9k / n repeatedly to toggle
between the parameters. See page 46 for details.
•Press 9l to cancel the measurement results and exit from
the automatic setup menu.
9 Press
I
MENU to turn off the GUI menu.
• After you have completed the automatic setup procedure, be sure to
disconnect the optimizer microphone.
• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct
sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit.
■ Reviewing the result of the automatic setup
Use this feature to review the result of the automatic setup.
1 Set the operation mode selector to
F
AMP and then
press
I
MENU to turn on the GUI screen.
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly and then 9h to select
“Auto Setup”.
3 Press 9k to select “Information”.
4 Press 9h and then 9k / n repeatedly to select the
desired check items.
If error or warning messages appear...
When this unit detects potential problems during the
automatic setup procedure, error or warning messages
appears in the result display. See the “Auto Setup” section
in “Troubleshooting” on page 126 for a complete list of
error or warning messages and proper remedies.
Press 9l to view the detailed information of the error or
warning messages.
Notes
Angle Check
Angle
Result
Retry
Exit Detail
Setup
Measurement Over
Successfully
Angle Check
Angle
Result
Retry
Exit Detail
Setup
Measurement Over
W1:Out of Phase
W3:Level Error
Error or warning messagesError or warning messages
Input Select
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Signal Info.
Information
Setup Menu
Start
Information
Setup Menu
Start
Multi Measure
Wiring
Distance
Multi Measure
Wiring
Distance
Size
Left Right
Front NRM NRM
Center NRM
Sur. NRM NRM
S.Back NRM NRM
F.PRNS NRM NRM
R.PRNS NRM NRM
SubWfr DET DET
Reload:ENTER
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
46 En
y
• You can reload the displayed result of the automatic setup by pressing
9ENTER.
• The results of the measurement that are the causes of the warning
message(s) appear in red.
• “–––” appears when no speaker is connected to the corresponding speaker
channel or this unit does not measure the corresponding speaker channel
yet.
• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening
environment, run “Auto Setup” again to recalibrate your system.
• The distances displayed in the “Distance” results may be longer than the
actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer or
external amplifiers if you connect them.
• In the “Equalizing” results, different values may be set for the same band
to provide finer adjustments.
• Even if you change the setting of “PEQ Select”, the equalizer type that is
displayed in “Equalizing” is not changed.
5 Once you finish the review of the result of the
automatic setup, press 9l repeatedly to exit from
the automatic setup menu.
y
• You can also set the parametric equalizer type by using “Parametric EQ” in
“Manual Setup” (see page 87).
• You can set the connected subwoofer phases by using “Phase” in “Manual
Setup” (see page 85).
You can use the multiple-point measurement feature to optimize up
to eight listening positions in a listening room and speaker angle
measurement feature to optimize the speakers for the effects of the
sound field programs.
• Before starting the operations, prepare the supplied microphone base.
• You can make fine adjustments of this unit by using the multiple-point
measurement and speaker angle measurement features, however it takes
from 30 seconds to 3 minutes to make the measurements at each listening
point.
The following listening room is set as the example in the following
instructions.
1
/2/3/4/5/6/7: Listening positions
1 Turn on the connected video monitor.
2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to this
unit and then place the microphone appropriately.
Refer to the steps 1 and 2 of “Using the quick automatic setup”
on page 43. First, place the optimizer microphone to the
listening position
1
.
Measurement Descriptions
Multi Measure
(Multiple point
measurement)
Displays the number of the points the measurements are
carried out at. For details, refer to “Using advanced
automatic setup” on this page.
Wiring
(Speaker wiring)
Displays the polarity of each connected speaker.
– “NRM” appears when the polarity of the connected
speaker is normal.
– “REV” appears when the polarity of the connected
speaker is reversed.
– “DET” appears when this unit detects the
subwoofer(s) is connected.
– “–––” appears when no speaker is connected to the
corresponding speaker channel.
Distance
(Speaker
distance)
Displays the speaker distance from the listening
position. Press 9h repeatedly to switch the unit to
display the value of the each speaker distance.
Size
(Speaker size)
Displays the size of the connected speakers and the bass
cross over frequency (“Cross”).
– “LRG” appears when the connected speaker has the
ability to reproduce the low-frequency signals
effectively.
– “SML” appears when the connected speaker does
not have the ability to reproduce the low-frequency
signals effectively.
Equalizing
(Speaker
equalizing)
Displays the result of the adjustment of the frequency
responses of each connected speaker. You can switch the
parametric equalizer type that appears in the result
display by pressing 9h repeatedly in the “Equalizing”
result display. To apply the result that is displayed in the
display, press 9ENTER.
Choices: Natural, Flat, Front
– Select “Natural” to average out the frequency
response of all speakers with higher frequencies
being less emphasized. Recommended if the “Flat”
setting sounds a little harsh.
– Select “Flat” to average the frequency response of all
speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are
of similar quality.
– Select “Front” to adjust the frequency response of
each speaker in accordance with the sound of your
front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers
are of much higher quality than your other speakers.
Level
(Speaker level)
Displays the result of the adjustment of each connected
speaker output level. You can display the result of the
adjustment of the speaker level for each parametric
equalizer type (see above) by pressing 9h repeatedly.
Select “Through” to display the result when this unit
does not use the parametric equalizer.
Standing Wave
(Standing wave
cancelling)
Displays the active band frequencies of the special
parametric equalizer for each speaker. Press 9h
repeatedly to switch the result of the front and rear
speaker.
Angle
(Speaker angle)
Displays the angles of the front speakers, surround
speakers, front presence speakers and rear presence
speakers at the measured point.
Notes
Using advanced automatic setup
Notes
1 7
2 6
43 5
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
47 En
Preparation
3 Press IMENU on the remote control.
Following menu screen appears in the video monitor.
4 Press 9k to select “Setup Menu” and then 9h.
The list of the measurements in the automatic setup appears in
the screen.
5 Press 9k repeatedly to select “Multi Measure”.
6 Press 9h and then 9k / n repeatedly to set the
number of the listening positions you want to make
the measurement at.
Choices: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
7 Press 9l to return to the previous menu level and
then press 9n repeatedly to select “Angle”.
8 Make sure that a check mark appears in the check
box of “Angle”.
If the check mark does not appears, press 9ENTER to select
the check box.
9 Once you have finished the settings, press 9l to
return to the previous menu level and then press 9n
to select “Start”.
This unit starts the measurement procedure. See page 44 for
details.
10 Once this unit pauses the automatic measurement
procedure and then “Put the microphone at 2nd
listening position” appears in the display, move the
optimizer microphone to the listening position
2
.
11 Press 9ENTER to start the measurement at the next
listening position.
y
To skip the measurements at the remaining listening positions, press
9n.
12 Repeat steps 10 and 11 until the measurements at all
listening points are completed.
13 Once following display appears in the video monitor,
place the supplied microphone base at the listening
point you want to be seated most frequently as
follows.
Make sure that the arrow mark on the microphone base points
the center speaker or between the front left and right speakers.
For the accurate measurements of the speaker angles, we strongly
recommend that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the microphone base at
the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your
listening position. You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to
fix the microphone base to the tripod (etc.).
14 Place the optimizer microphone to the “(1)” position
on the microphone base.
Information
Setup Menu
Start Start:ENTER
✓
✓
✓
3
Information
Setup Menu
Start
Multi Measure
Wiring
Distance
Pre Check
Main Check
Wiring
Distance
Put the microphone at
2nd listening position
Next:ENTER
Skip:
Note
1
23
FRONT
DIRECTION
Equalizing
Level
Angle Check
Angle
Result
Put the microphone at
1st listening position
Next:ENTER
Microphone base
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
48 En
15 Once the setting has been completed, press
9ENTER.
This unit starts the measurements of the speaker angles.
16 Once the following display appears in the video
monitor, move the optimizer microphone to the “(2)”
position on the microphone base.
17 Press 9ENTER to resume the measurements.
18 Once the following display appears in the video
monitor, move the optimizer microphone to the “(3)”
position on the microphone base.
19 Press 9ENTER to resume the measurements.
20 Once the measurement procedure has been
complete, following display appears in the video
monitor.
See page 45 for details.
1
23
Equalizing
Level
Angle Check
Angle
Result
Put the microphone at
2nd listening position
Next:ENTER
1
23
Equalizing
Level
Angle Check
Angle
Result
Put the microphone at
3rd listening position
Next:ENTER
Angle Check
Angle
Result
Retry
Exit Detail
Setup
Measurement Over
Successfully
For other configuration of the listening position
The following examples indicate the measurement points when
there is a listening position or are two listening positions.
Example 1: Two listening positions
We recommend that you make measurements in front of and
behind the listening positions as well as the listening positions.
Example 2: One listening position
We recommend that you make measurements around the
listening position as well as the listening position.
1 2
4
3
24
5
1
3
Basic Operation
Playback ................................................................................................ 50
Basic procedure ................................................................................................................. 50
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component ................................................................... 50
Selecting the HDMI OUT jack .......................................................................................... 51
Selecting the front speaker set ........................................................................................... 51
Using your headphones ...................................................................................................... 51
Playing video sources in the background of an audio source ............................................ 51
Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) ................................................................ 52
Muting the audio output .................................................................................................... 52
Using the sleep timer ......................................................................................................... 52
Operating this unit by using the graphical user interface (GUI) menu .............................. 53
Sound field programs .......................................................................... 54
Selecting sound field programs ......................................................................................... 54
Sound field program descriptions ...................................................................................... 54
Using CINEMA DSP HD³ mode ....................................................................................... 60
Enjoying unprocessed input sources .................................................................................. 60
Using audio features ............................................................................ 61
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound .................................................................................................. 61
Adjusting the tonal quality ................................................................................................ 61
Adjusting the speaker level ................................................................................................ 61
Recording ............................................................................................. 62
Basic Operation
Playback
50 En
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit.
y
• If you connect two video monitors to the HDMI OUT jacks of this
unit, press CHDMI OUT repeatedly to select the active video
monitor.
• You can control this unit by using the graphical user interface (GUI)
screen. See page 53 for details.
• You can turn on or off the short message displays in the video
monitor. See page 90 for details.
2 Rotate the
D
INPUT selector (or press one of the
input selector buttons (3)) to select the desired
input source.
The name of the currently selected input source appears in the
front panel display and in the short message display for a few
seconds.
3 Start playback on the selected source component or
select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the instruction manuals for the source component.
• See page 66 for details about playback of Internet Radio
programs and the music contents in the PC or USB storage
devices.
4 Rotate
E
VOLUME (or press
J
VOLUME +/–) to
adjust the volume to the desired output level.
Control range: Mute, –80.0 dB (minimum) to
+16.5 dB (maximum)
y
See page 61 to adjust the level of each speaker.
5 Rotate the
I
PROGRAM selector (or press one of
the sound field program selector buttons (Q)
repeatedly) to select the desired sound field
program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in the
front panel display and in the short message display. See
page 54 for details about sound field programs.
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
source (see page 50).
y
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not
merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the
last sound field program used with the corresponding input source.
Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI
CH INPUT jacks (see page 35) as the input source.
Rotate the
D
INPUT selector (or press
3
MULTI) to
select “MULTI CH”.
y
Use “MULTI CH” menu in “Input Select” to set the parameters for MULTI
CH (see page 83).
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to
the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 54).
Playback
Caution
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs
encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a
DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some
unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether
your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the
sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD
encoded in DTS.
y
To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, set
“Decoder Mode” in “Input Select” to “DTS” before playback (see
page 82).
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode
selector on the remote control to
F
AMP.
Basic procedure
TUNERMULTI CHPHONOCDCD-RDVDDTVDVRVCR
MD
TAPE
BD
HD DVD
CBL
SAT
V-AUX
DOCK
NET
USB
DVD
Currently selected input source
Available input sources
Note
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component
Note
Movie
Sci-Fi
Currently selected sound field program
Currently selected sound field program category
Playback
51 En
Basic Operation
Use this feature to select the HDMI OUT jack to output the input
signals.
Press CHDMI OUT on the remote control repeatedly to
select the desired setting of “HDMI OUT SEL”.
Each time you press CHDMI OUT, the front panel display changes
as shown below.
Use this feature to turn the front speaker system (FRONT A and/or
FRONT B) on or off.
Press
G
SPEAKERS A and/or
G
SPEAKERS B on the
front panel to turn on or off the set of front speakers
connected to the FRONT A and/or EXTRA SP speaker
terminals.
Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front speaker
setting.
■ Using the Zone B feature
When you set “Speaker B” to “ZoneB” (see page 91), you can use
the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals in
another room (Zone B).
Press GSPEAKERS B on the front panel repeatedly to
turn on or off the Zone B speakers.
When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in the main
room are muted.
You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers
simultaneously.
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio
cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel.
y
When you select a sound field program, the SILENT CINEMA mode
activates automatically (see page 60).
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker
terminals.
• All digital multi-channel audio signals (except DSD signals) are mixed
down to the left and right headphone channels.
• If you connect or disconnect your headphones to or from this unit in the
party mode, the sounds in the zones that join in the party mode are muted
for a moment.
• The audio signals input at the CENTER and SUBWOOFER MULTI CH
INPUT jacks are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels.
You can combine a video image from a video source with sound
from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to
classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video
source in the video monitor.
Press the input selector buttons (3) to select a video
source and then an audio source.
y
Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH” menu to the desired setting to
select the default background video input source of the MULTI CH INPUT
sources (see page 83).
Selecting the HDMI OUT jack
Choice Functions
OUT 1
Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
OUT 2
Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
OFF
Does not output any signals at the HDMI OUT 1 and 2
jacks. Select this setting when you do not use the video
monitor connected to one of the HDMI OUT jacks.
Selecting the front speaker set
Note
Note
OUT 1 OUT 2
OFF
Using your headphones
Notes
Playing video sources in the background
of an audio source
MASTER
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
MIC
OPTIMIZER
AUDIO
SELECT
SPEAKERS
AB
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
ON/OFF
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MULTI
ZONE
ZONE ON/OFF
MENU
TONE CONTROL
ZONE
CONTROLS
REC OUT/
ZONE 2
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
SEARCH MODE
PUSH ENTER
PROGRAM
R
L
OPTICAL
HDMI IN USB
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 3 ZONE 4
ZONE 2
DVD CD
V-AUXMULTI
PHONO
CD-R
DTV DVR VCR
DOCK
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
TAPE
CBL
SAT
NET
USB
: Audio source buttons
: Video source buttons
Playback
52 En
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (audio
input jack select) to switch the input jack assigned to an input
source when more than one jacks are assigned to an input source.
y
• We recommend setting the audio input jack select to “AUTO” in most
cases.
• You can adjust the default the audio input jack select of this unit by using
“Audio Select” in “Option” (see page 93).
• You can also set the audio input jack select setting in “Audio Select” in
“Input Select” (see page 82).
1 Rotate the
D
INPUT selector (or press one of the
input selector buttons (3)) to select the desired
input source.
2 Press
F
AUDIO SELECT (or
O
AUDIO SEL)
repeatedly to select the desired Audio input jack
select setting.
This feature is not available when no digital input jack (OPTICAL,
COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. Use “I/O Assignment” in “Input
Select” to reassign the respective input jack (see page 81).
Press
L
MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio
output. Press
L
MUTE again to resume the audio output.
“VOLUME” flashes in the front panel display when the audio
output is muted.
y
• You can also rotate
E
VOLUME on the front panel or press
J
VOLUME
+/– on the remote control to resume the audio output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using the “Muting Type” parameter in
“Volume” (see page 86).
Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the standby
mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when
you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a
source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external
components connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 38).
1 Press one of the input selector buttons (3) on the
remote control to select the desired input source.
2 Start playback on the selected source component or
select a broadcast station.
Refer to the operating instructions for the source component.
3 Press
C
SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Each time you press
C
SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the
amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set,
the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and
the display returns to the selected sound field program.
■ Canceling the sleep timer
Press
C
SLEEP repeatedly until “OFF” appears in the
front panel display.
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “OFF” disappears from the
front panel display after a few seconds.
y
• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
A
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF (or
D
STANDBY) to set the main zone to the standby mode.
• You can also set the sleep timer for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4. See
page 117 for details.
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)
AUTO
Automatically selects input signals in the following
order:
(1) HDMI
(2) Digital signals
(3) Analog signals
HDMI
Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not
input, no sound is output.
COAX/OPT
Automatically selects input signals in the following
order:
(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack.
(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack.
When no signals are input, no sound is output.
ANALOG
Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are
input, no sound is output.
Note
Muting the audio output
Available input sources
TUNERMULTI CHPHONOCDCD-RDVDDTVDVRVCR
MD
TAPE
BD
HD DVD
CBL
SAT
V-AUX
DOCK
NET
USB
A.SEL: AUTO
Currently selected Audio input jack select
setting
Using the sleep timer
120min. 90min.
60min.30min.OFF
SLEEP
SLEEP
120min.
Flashes
SLEEP
STRAIGHT
Lights up
SLEEP
OFF
Disappears
Playback
53 En
Basic Operation
This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) menu that helps you to control the amplifier function of this unit. With the
GUI menu, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit. You can also set up this unit using the GUI
menu (see page 74).
■ Items in GUI menu
y
• Set the operation mode selector to
F
AMP when you operate this unit by using GUI menu.
• See page 74 for details about the contents in the menu area.
• This unit reserves the previously selected GUI menu.
■ Basic controls in the GUI menu ■ Basic operation of the GUI menu by using the
front panel controls
Operating this unit by using the graphical user interface (GUI) menu
DVD
Manual Setu
p
-40.0dB
qPLIIx Movie Sci-Fi
3D
Currently selected decoder
Currently selected
sound field program
Menu area
Currently selected
input source
Currently selected
menu item
Current menu directory
Volume level
(see page 50)
Stereo/Surround
Input Select
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Sound
Video
Basic
Multi Zone
Network
Button Function
9 Cursor k / n
Selects the item in the current menu level.
9 Cursor h
Selects the currently selected menu item and
moves to the next menu level.
9 Cursor l
Returns to the previous menu level.
9 ENTER
Selects the currently selected menu item and
moves to the next menu level.
I MENU
Turns on or off the GUI menu.
IPROGRAM Function
Turn left/right
Selects the item in the current menu level.
Press
Selects the currently selected menu item and moves to
the next menu level.
Button Functions
JMENU
Turns on or off the GUI menu.
Ll
Returns to the previous menu level.
Mh
Selects the currently selected menu item and moves to
the next menu level.
Sound field programs
54 En
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or
multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound
field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
y
• The Yamaha CINEMA DSP sound field program are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Surround, Dolby TrueHD, and DTS-HD sources.
• The Yamaha HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual concert halls, music
venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.
Rotate the
I
PROGRAM selector (or set the operation
mode selector to
F
AMP and then press one of the
sound field selector buttons (Q) repeatedly).
The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front
panel display and in the short message display.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last
sound field program used with the corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected
to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see
page 50) or when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode (see page 61).
• Sampling frequencies higher than 96 kHz are sampled down to 96 kHz or
lower and then sound field programs are applied.
y
You can select the desired sound field programs and setting the parameters
by using GUI menu. See page 77 for details.
y
Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.
The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ
depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
Sound field programs
Selecting sound field programs
Notes
Sound field program descriptions
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science
fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between
dialog, sound effects and background music.
Name of the
program
Created sound
fields
CINEMA DSP
or
HiFi DSP
Sci-Fi
Program description
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Complex
Characteristics of the program (see page 55)
Sound field indicators
y
When the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode is active (see page 60), the HD³
sound field indicators light up.
Note
Presence sound field
Listening position
Surround left
sound field
Surround right
sound field
Surround back sound field
HD³ sound field
indicators
Sound field programs
55 En
Basic Operation
■ For audio music sources
y
For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 61), the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 60), or surround decode mode (see
page 72).
CLASSICAL 1
Descriptions of the characteristics of the sound field programs
Following indexes indicates the characteristics and trends of each sound field program.
Size of sound field space (Size)
(For the HiFi DSP and CINEMA DSP programs)
Indicates the size of the sound field to be generated. If the value for
this item is small, the sound is that of a small space, while if the
value is large, the sound is that of a vast space.
Vertical/horizontal balance (V/H balance)
(For the HiFi DSP and CINEMA DSP programs)
Indicates the balance of the vertical (height) and horizontal
directions for the sound field to be generated. If this item is more in
the horizontal direction, the sound is that of a space with strong
reflections from the walls, while if it is more in the vertical direction,
the sound is that of a space with strong reflections from the ceiling.
Front/rear balance (F/R balance)
(For the CINEMA DSP programs only)
A CINEMA DSP sound field processing expressing whether the
effect is stronger towards the front or rear. When the effect is
stronger towards the front, the listener senses a feeling of openness
and depth towards the screen, while when the effect is stronger
towards the rear, the listener gets a sense of envelopment and
movement. Suits basically all types of contents for programs with a
good front/rear balance, and is effective when selected appropriately
for programs in which the balance is more towards either the front or
rear.
Sound field atmosphere (Atmosphere)
(For the HiFi DSP programs)
The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to whether it
is nearer to one or the other of the following;
Simple: Sounds that fade straight-forwardly, with a light, gentle
impression, depending on the program. This suits almost all contents
relatively well, but provides little brilliance or powerfulness.
Complex: Sounds transform in complex ways as they fade out, with
a rich, brilliant impression, depending on the program.
This is extremely effective for the right contents, but is suited for a
smaller range of contents.
(For the CINEMA DSP programs)
The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to whether it
is nearer to one or the other of the following;
Calm: An overall composed, moderate effect, stressing the overall
quality of the atmosphere without aiming at any extreme effects.
This suits almost all contents relatively well, but provides little
showiness or powerfulness.
Powerful: Designed with specific contents in mind (expressing vast
spaces, feverish excitement, etc.). This is extremely effective for the
right contents, but is suited for a smaller range of contents.
Hall in Munich A
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using
stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls.
Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Munich B
This hall is frequently used for recording orchestral music, and is a shoe-box type concert
hall with around 1300 seats. The hall is constructed from marble, resulting in relatively flat
resonance. Further, the high ceiling causes sound to reverberate for longer than usual.
Hall in Frankfurt
This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with around 2400 seats located in Frankfurt. This
hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The listener’s virtual seat is in the center-right
section on the first floor.
The characteristics of the sound field programs may differ depending on the settings of the listening room, etc.
Note
Small Large
Vertical Horizontal
Front Rear
Simple Complex
Calm Powerful
CLASSICAL 1
1
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
Sound field programs
56 En
CLASSICAL 2
LIVE/CLUB
Hall in Stuttgart
This is a large asymmetrical concert hall with around 2000 seats located in downtown
Stuttgart. Sound reflected off the concrete wall located to the left of listeners has a
powerful presence.
Hall in Vienna
This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that
is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections
from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.
Hall in Amsterdam
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2200 around the circle stage. Reflections are
rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
Hall in USA A
This is a large 2600 seat concert hall in the United States which features a fairly traditional
European design. The interior is relatively simple, in the American style. The middle and
high frequencies are richly and beautifully reinforced.
Hall in USA B
This spacious arch-shaped hall has a dome ceiling and can seat 2600. The ample
resonance apparent in the sound is a feature brought about by longer than average period
of reverberation. In addition to this, the reflector suspended above the stage allows
listeners to experience rich sound from the direction of the stage.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a
palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber
music.
Church in Tokyo
The acoustic environment of an ordinary church with moderate reverberations. The
reverberation lasts 2.5 seconds. This is ideal for reproducing church organ and choral
music.
Church in Freiburg
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed tower at 120
meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling enable the elongated
reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather
than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of the church.
Church in Royaumont
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a beautiful
medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of Paris.
Village Gate
This is the sound field at a jazz club that was in New York. It is in a basement and has a
relatively spacious floor area. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
Village Vanguard
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling makes the
powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the corner.
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
CLASSICAL 2
2
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
LIVE/CLUB
3
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
Sound field programs
57 En
Basic Operation
■ For various sources
ENTERTAIN
■ For visual sources of music
ENTERTAIN
The Bottom Line
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz
club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real
and vibrant sound.
Cellar Club
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic,
live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460
seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
Warehouse Loft
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete walls clearly
with a lot of energy.
Arena
This is the sound field of a large arena, with just the right sense of distance from the stage.
A dynamic sound field reproduces the power of live performances.
Sports
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety
programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator
and sportscaster are positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the stadium
expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the
stadium.
Music Video
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and
jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence
sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm
instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes
the depth and clarity of human voices. “Recital/Opera” offers the reverberations of an
orchestra box in front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning
and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but
the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The
listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.
Pavilion
This program reproduces vocals clearly, letting you feel the spaciousness of a pavilion.
Reverberation, which is somewhat delayed, reproduces the live acoustics unique to a
pavilion, and helps to make concert scenes more exciting.
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
ENTERTAIN
4
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
ENTERTAIN
4
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Sound field programs
58 En
■ For parties
ENTERTAIN
■ For game programs
ENTERTAIN
■ For movie sources
y
You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 72 for details.
MOVIE
Disco
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city.
The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-energy,
“immediate” sound.
Action Game
This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the
reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing
environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while
maintaining a clear sense of directions.
Roleplaying Game
This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound
field effects for movies and the sound field design used with “Action Game” to represent
the depth and spatial feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround
effects in the movie scenes in the game.
Standard
This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing
the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It
has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
Spectacle
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It
reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen
movies with an excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science
fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between
dialog, sound effects and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also
restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the
sound.
Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres
from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an
optimum spatial feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but
cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the
listener even after long hours of viewing.
ENTERTAIN
4
HiFi DSP
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
ENTERTAIN
4
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
MOVIE
5
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Sound field programs
59 En
Basic Operation
■ Stereo playback
STEREO
■ For compression artifacts
(Compressed Music Enhancer mode)
ENHANCER
■ Surround decoder mode
SUR. DECODE
■ THX Surround mode
THX
Use this feature to play back sources with the accurate surround
processing programs compliant with the THX specifications. See
page 72 for details.
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum
expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a
certain sound depth.
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels.
11ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2 channels, and
then output the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
Straight Enhancer
Use this program to improve the sound enhancer nearest to the original
depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel compression artifacts.
11ch Enhancer
Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 11-channel stereo.
Surround Decode
Use this program to play back sources with using the desired surround
decoders.
STEREO
6
HiFi DSP
ENHANCER
7
SUR. DECODE
8
THX
9
Sound field programs
60 En
■ Using sound field programs without surround
speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP or
HiFi DSP sound field programs without surround speakers. It
creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
When you set “Surround” to
“None” (see page 84), Virtual
CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a
CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 54).
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “Surround” is set to
“None” (see page 84) and you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound
field program in the following cases:
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is
selected as the input source (see page 50).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– when this unit is in the “11ch Stereo” mode.
■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field
programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or
movie sound through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the
PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound
field programs (see page 54). When activated, the SILENT
CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display.
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 50).
• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see page 61) or
“2ch Stereo” mode (see page 59) is selected, or when this unit is in the
“STRAIGHT” mode.
CINEMA DSP HD³ mode creates the intensive and accurate
stereoscopic sound field in the listening room. You can activate and
deactivate the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode.
Press
P
3D DSP repeatedly to turn on and off the
CINEMA DSP HD³ mode.
• “HD CUBIC:ON” appears in the front panel display and the HD³
indicator (see page 40) and HD³ sound field indicators light up
while this unit is in the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode. CINEMA
DSP HD³ mode creates the intensive and stereoscopic sound
field in the listening room.
• “HD CUBIC:OFF” appears in the front panel display and the
HD³ indicator disappears when the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode is
turned off. Conventional CINEMA DSP mode creates the large
and expanding sound field in the listening room.
• “HD CUBIC:––” appears when the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode is not
available.
• If you set “Front Presence” to “None”, this unit cannot activate the
CINEMA DSP HD³ mode.
• This unit activates the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode only when you select one
of the CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (except the “11ch
Stereo” mode).
• When your headphones are connected to this unit, this unit cannot activate
the CINEMA DSP HD³ mode.
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel stereo
sources are output from only the front left and right speakers and
multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate
channels without any additional effect processing.
y
You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by using GUI menu. See
page 78 for details.
Press
H
STRAIGHT (or
R
STRAIGHT) to select
“STRAIGHT”.
y
• The names of the audio signal format of the input source and the active
decoder appear in the front panel display.
• You can select the extended surround mode used with the “STRAIGHT”
mode by pressing NEXTD SUR. (see page 72).
■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode
Press
H
STRAIGHT (or
R
STRAIGHT) so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display.
The sound effect is turned back on.
y
You can also select desired sound field program by rotating
I
PROGRAM
(or press one of the desired sound field program buttons (Q)) repeatedly.
Note
Notes
Before performing the following operation, set the operation mode
selector on the remote control to
F
AMP.
Using CINEMA DSP HD³ mode
Notes
Enjoying unprocessed input sources
STRAIGHT
Basic Operation
61 En
Basic Operation
Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound of the
selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is activated, this unit
plays back the selected source with the least circuitry.
Press
C
PURE DIRECT (or
M
PURE DIRECT) to turn
on or off the Pure Direct mode.
The CPURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up and the
front panel display automatically turns off while this unit is in the
Pure Direct mode.
• When you set Audio input jack selects to “Auto”, “HDMI”, or “Coax/Opt”
(see page 52) and play back the bitstreams or multi-channel PCM sources,
this unit activates the corresponding decoder.
• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in the Pure
Direct mode:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the GUI menu
– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)
• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this unit is
turned off.
• When you set “Pure Direct” in “Manual Setup” to “Video On”, you can
display the video images of the current input source (see page 89). You
cannot use the GUI menu while this unit is un the Pure Direct mode even if
“Pure Direct” in “Manual Setup” to “Video On”.
• While this unit is in the Pure Direct mode, you cannot activate Zone 2,
Zone 3, and Zone 4, and when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode, Zone 2,
Zone 3, and Zone 4 are automatically tuned off.
y
The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation is
performed.
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front
L/R and center speaker channels and the subwoofer channel.
1 Press
M
TONE CONTROL on the front panel.
2 Press
I
PROGRAM repeatedly to select the high-
frequency response (TREBLE), or the low-frequency
response (BASS).
3 Rotate
I
PROGRAM to adjust the high-frequency
response (TREBLE), or the low-frequency response
(BASS).
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the
low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround
speakers may not match that of the front L/R and center speakers and the
subwoofer.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT or the THX
Surround mode is selected, or when MULTI CH is selected as the input
source.
y
Use “Tone Control” parameter in “Sound” menu to adjust the balance of
bass and treble output to your speakers or headphones by using GUI menu.
See page 88 for details.
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a
music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at
the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
This operation will override the level adjustments made in “Auto Setup”
(see page 42) and “Speaker Level” (see page 86).
1 Press
8
LEVEL on the remote control repeatedly to
select the speaker you want to adjust
.
y
Once you press
8
LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select
the speaker by pressing 9k / n.
2 Press 9l / h to adjust the speaker output level.
• Press 9h to increase the value.
• Press 9l to decrease the value.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Using audio features
Before performing the following operation, set the operation mode
selector on the remote control to
F
AMP.
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound
Notes
Adjusting the tonal quality
Notes
Adjusting the speaker level
Note
Display Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
SUR. L
Surround left speaker
SUR. R
Surround right speaker
SB L
Surround back left speaker
SB R
Surround back right speaker
SWFR L
Subwoofer left
SWFR R
Subwoofer right
FP L
Front presence left speaker
FP R
Front presence right speaker
RP L
Rear presence left speaker
RP R
Rear presence right speaker
Recording
62 En
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those
components.
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• TONE CONTROL (see page 61) and the volume settings, the speaker level (see page 86) and the sound field programs (see page 54) do not affect recorded
material.
• When this unit is in the Pure Direct mode, no signals output at the AUDIO OUT jacks.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks on this unit cannot be recorded.
• The Internet Radio, PC or MCX audio signals are only output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the
AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals,
you can only record digital or analog signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same AUDIO OUT channel.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input
from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or a composite video signal on
your VCR.
• The analog audio and video signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks and DVR or VCR OUT jacks for recording.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
1 Turn on all the connected components.
2 Press
L
REC OUT/ZONE2 until the RECOUT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
This unit in the recording source selecting mode.
3 Rotate
I
PROGRAM to select the source
component you want to record from.
Carry out the operation while the RECOUT indicator is lit.
y
Select “SOURCE” to record the currently selected input source.
4 Start playback on the selected source component or
select a broadcast station.
5 Start recording on the recording component.
Recording
Caution
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if
you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-
encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to
make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player.
Notes
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those
signals.
RECOUT
Internal Source
Operation
Using iPod™ ........................................................................................ 64
Controlling iPod™ ............................................................................................................ 64
Using Network/USB features ............................................................. 66
Navigating the network and USB menus .......................................................................... 66
Using a PC server or Yamaha MCX-2000 ........................................................................ 68
Using the Internet Radio ................................................................................................... 69
Using a USB storage device or a USB portable audio player .......................................... 69
Using shortcut buttons ...................................................................................................... 70
Internal Source Operation
Using iPod™
64 En
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal
on this unit (see page 36), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode of this unit to enhance the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see
page 59).
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
y
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and video monitor, see the “iPod” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 126.
• Once your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal on this unit, this unit
begins signal transmission with your iPod.
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display.
• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal on this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when
this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “Standby Charge” parameter in “iPod” (see page 93).
• While the stationed iPod is being charged in the standby mode of this unit, the battery charge indicator (see page 40) appears in the front panel display. Once
the charge is complete (or after 4 hours from the start of the charge), the indicator disappears.
You can control your iPod when “DOCK” is selected as the input
source. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the
GUI screen of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple
remote mode).
■ Remote control operation
■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode
You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip,
etc.) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the video
monitor.
y
• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod (some models
only).
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.
■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode
You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the
supplied remote control with the aid of the video monitor. The name
of the song being played appears in the front panel display
according to the “Scroll” parameter in “Front Panel Disp.” (see
page 93). You can also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the
by using your video monitor. Further, you can change or adjust
settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences.
• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel
display or in the GUI screen of this unit. Those characters are replaced
with underscores “_”.
• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the
GUI screen. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy watching the photos or
video clips stored on your iPod.
• You can set the time for which the GUI screen of iPod is displayed in the
video monitor by using the “On Screen” parameter in “Manual Setup” (see
page 90).
1 Press
K
DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following display appears in the video monitor.
Using iPod™
Notes
Controlling iPod™
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode
selector on the remote control to
F
SOURCE and then press 3DOCK.
Button Function
9 ENTER Subsequent menu
k Menu up
n Menu down
l Previous menu
h Subsequent menu
A ll Search backward (Press and hold)
hh
Search forward
(Press and hold)
a Skip forward
b Skip backward
s Stop
e Pause (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
p Play (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
I MENU Previous menu
K DISPLAY Display
Notes
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode
selector on the remote control to
F
SOURCE and then press 3DOCK.
Top
Playlist
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
Settings
Using iPod™
65 En
Internal Source
Operation
2 Press
9
k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod menu and
then press
9
ENTER to begin playback of the
selected song.
Choices: Playlist (playlists), Artists (artists),
Albums (albums), Songs (songs),
Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Settings
(settings)
• Playlist > Songs
• Artists > Albums > Songs
• Albums > Songs
• Songs
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in random
order.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random order.
• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in random order.
• When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” appears in the
top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.
•Press 9ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the settings of “Shuffle”.
Repeat (Repeat)
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of
songs.
Choices: Off, One, All
• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs.
• When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ” appears
in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being
repeated.
•Press 9ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the settings of “Repeat”.
y
Press KDISPLAY again to turn off the iPod menu.
■ The functions of the play information display
1 Track number/total tracks
2 Name of the album
3 Name of the song
4 Elapsed time
5 (playback), (pausing), (search forward) or
(search backward)
6 Shuffle and repeat icons
7 Name of the artist
8 Progress bar
9 Remaining time
Notes
Notes
iPod menu in the Zone OSD
You can control your iPod by using the Zone OSD. The design and
functions may be different from the iPod menu displayed in the video
monitor in the main zone.
0:51 -7:44
Road to India
Made-to-order
Frankie Zipper
1/9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
iPod Information
Using Network/USB features
66 En
This unit is equipped with network and USB features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files
saved on your PC, Yamaha MCX-2000, USB storage device and USB portable audio player or access the Internet Radio.
• Yamaha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical reference books, if needed.
• Some WAV, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played.
y
For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and video monitor, see the “Network and USB” section in “Troubleshooting” on
page 124.
The following diagram shows the construction of the network and USB menu.
* Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed.
y
You can also browse and select the desired contents by using your PC. See page 101 for details.
Using Network/USB features
Notes
Navigating the network and USB menus
Note
NET/USB PC/MusicCAST
(MCX-2000)
Popular Stations
New Stations
USB
Server*
Internet Radio
Files/Directories
Help
Location
Podcasts
Bookmark
Genres
Selects an Internet Radio station that has been added to the “Bookmark” list (see page 69).
Selects an Internet Radio station or a Podcast service by location.
Broadcasts voice-assisted guidelines on various topics of the related Internet service.
Selects a file by navigating directories.
Selects an Internet Radio station or a Podcast service by genre.
Selects an Internet Radio station from the ones that have recently started the service.
Selects an Internet Radio station from the list of popular stations.
Selects a Podcast service by location or genre.
My Added Station
Selects an Internet Radio station that you add to the list of the stations.
Using Network/USB features
67 En
Internal Source
Operation
The following procedure shows the basic steps to navigate the
network and USB menus. See pages 68 to 70 for details about each
sub input source.
1 Press
3
NET/USB on the remote control to select
“NET/USB” as the input source.
The cursor on the left of the NET/USB indicator lights up in
the front panel display, and the contents previously played for
the corresponding sub input source of NET/USB is
automatically played.
2 Press
K
DISPLAY to display the top NET/USB menu.
The following display appears in the video monitor.
If any other screen appears in the video monitor, press
I
MENU on the remote control repeatedly until the top NET/
USB menu appears.
3 Press
9
k / n to select the desired sub input source
and then press
9
h or
9
ENTER.
y
You can also select the desired sub input source by pressing
A
PC/
MCX
, A
NET RADIO, or
A
USB when “NET/USB” is selected as
the input source. This unit automatically starts playback of the last
selected music file, Internet Radio station, or Podcast when you press
A
PC/MCX
, A
NET RADIO, or
A
USB.
4 Press
9
k / n / l / h to select the desired song or
Internet Radio station.
•Press
9
k / n to select the desired menu.
•Press
9
h to enter the selected menu.
•Press
9
l to return to the previous menu level.
y
• “>” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that there is a
submenu available in the next menu level.
• You can also press 9ENTER or
I
MENU to enter the selected
menu or to return to the previous menu level.
5 Press
9
ENTER to play the selected song or to listen
to the selected station.
y
• See page 65 for details about the functions of the play information display.
• Some items do not appear in the play information display depending on
the selected sub input source.
• You can set the time for which the GUI screen of the network/USB is
displayed in the video monitor by using “On Screen” in “Manual Setup”
(see page 90).
• Press KDISPLAY again to turn off the Network/USB menu.
■ Remote control operation
*1 Press and hold to store your favorite Internet Radio stations with
bookmarks (see page 69).
*2 Press to assign or recall the preset items (see page 70).
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode
selector on the remote control to
F
SOURCE.
TUNERMULTI CHPHONOCDCD-RDVDDTVDVRVCR
MD
TAPE
BD
HD DVD
CBL
SAT
V-AUX
DOCK
NET
USB
Lights up
Top
PC/MusicCAST
Internet Radio
USB
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode
selector on the remote control to
F
SOURCE and then press 3NET/
USB.
Button Function
8 TITLE
Bookmark
*1
9 k Up
n Down
l Previous menu
h Subsequent menu
ENTER Subsequent menu
0 MEMORY Memory
A NET RADIO Select “NET RADIO”
USB Select “USB”
b Skip backward (“PC/MCX” and “USB” only)
a Skip forward (“PC/MCX” and “USB” only)
PC/MCX Select “PC/MCX”
s Stop
p Play
B 1 – 8
Numeric buttons (1-8)
*2
I MENU Previous menu
K DISPLAY Display
Network/USB menu in the Zone OSD
You can use the network/USB feature with the Zone OSD. The design
and functions may be different from the network/USB menu displayed in
the video monitor in the main zone.
Using Network/USB features
68 En
Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or Yamaha
MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that enhances the concept
of Yamaha exclusive MusicCAST, a digital music delivery method
over a personal network.
1 Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC, or
register this unit on your Yamaha MCX-2000.
• Refer to “Installing Windows Media Player 11 on your PC”
and “Registering this unit on the Yamaha MCX-2000” on
page 68.
• This procedure is needed only the first time.
• (PC only) You may need to make some setting of Windows
Media Player 11 to start the contents sharing. Refer to the
attached documents of Windows Media Player 11.
2 Turn on your PC or MCX-2000.
The PC server or MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the
submenu of PC/MusicCAST.
3 Select a desired server or MusicCAST to begin
playback.
• Yamaha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• You can connect this unit to up to 15 PC servers and 1
MCX-2000, and each server must be connected to the same subnet as this
unit.
• Some WAV, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files on your PC may not be
playable or may be noisy when played.
• (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not been
converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files immediately
unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting of this unit to “ON” on
MCX-2000. For details, refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000.
y
• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at the bottom
of the playback information screen.
• You can use
A
b / a to skip backward/forward and
A
h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the video
monitor.
• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the “Play
Style” parameters in “NET/USB” (see page 83).
• You can set the front panel display mode by using the “Scroll” parameter
in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 93).
■ Installing Windows Media Player 11 on your PC
With Windows Media Player 11, you can play back the audio files
on your PC. For details refer to the documents of Windows Media
Player 11.
y
You can also play back the audio files on your PC with Windows Media
Connect 2.0 installed.
1 Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
You can download the installer of Windows Media Player 11
from the Microsoft website, or use the upgrade function of the
installed Microsoft Windows Media Player.
2 Turn on your PC and then share a folder on the PC.
The Shared folder is added to the server list on the submenu of
PC/MusicCAST.
• If the operating system (OS) of your PC is Windows Vista, Windows
Media Player 11 is pre-installed (except some products).
• Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus software, firewall
software, etc.) may block the access of this unit to your PC. In such cases,
configure the security software appropriately.
■ Registering this unit on the Yamaha MCX-2000
You must register this unit on your Yamaha MCX-2000 so that this
unit can be recognized by your Yamaha MCX-2000. For details,
refer to the operation manual supplied with your Yamaha MCX-
2000.
1 Turn off this unit.
2 Set your Yamaha MCX-2000 to the “Auto Config”
mode.
3 Turn on this unit.
• MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/
MCX.
• The client ID of this unit appears in the OSD of your
Yamaha MCX-2000 (shown as CL-XXXXX), and this
completes the automatic configuration procedure.
• The latter part of the client ID of this unit is same as the last 5 digits of the
MAC address of this unit. For details about MAC address, see page 93.
• To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual Config”
mode of your Yamaha MCX-2000 (refer to the instruction manual of
MCX-2000) and then set “INITIALIZE” in the advanced setup menu of
this unit to “NETWORK” (see page 119).
• The client control functions of MusicCAST over this unit other than “View
Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client title” are not
available. Avoid using these functions as it will stop the playback on this
unit.
Using a PC server or Yamaha
MCX-2000
Notes
Notes
Notes
Using Network/USB features
69 En
Internal Source
Operation
Use this feature to listen to Internet Radio stations. This unit uses
the vTuner Internet Radio station database service particularly
customized for this unit, providing over 2000 radio station database.
Further, you can store your favorite stations with bookmarks.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• Some Internet Radio stations may not be played even if they are selected in
the NET RADIO menu.
• To listen to the Internet Radio, connect this unit to your network (see
page 37).
• A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will not
provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is strongly
recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem, etc.). For detailed
information, consult with your ISP.
y
• You can use
A
h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu
in the video monitor.
• “Podcast” is a type of the Internet Radio service, and there are a number of
Podcast services available on the Internet. The Podcast is not a continuous
service. That is, this unit stops playback when an episode of the Podcast
ends.
• Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access of this unit
to Internet Radio stations. In such cases, configure the security settings
appropriately.
■ Storing your favorite Internet Radio stations
with bookmarks
Use this feature to select your favorite Internet Radio stations
quickly.
Press and hold
8
TITLE on the remote control while the
selected Internet Radio station service is being
broadcast.
The stored Internet Radio station is added to the “Bookmark” list
(see page 66).
y
• To remove the stored station from the list, select the item in the first level
of the “Bookmark” list and then press and hold
8
TITLE on the remote
control.
• You can also register your favorite Internet Radio stations to this unit by
accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use
this feature, you need the MAC address of this unit as the ID number and
your e-mail address to create your personal account. Use “Information” in
the “Network” menu to display the MAC address of this unit (see
page 92). For details, refer to the help information on the website.
URL: http://yradio.vtuner.com/
Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA and
MPEG-4 AAC files saved on your USB storage device or USB
portable audio player connected to the USB port on the front panel
of this unit.
This unit is equipped with the front and rear USB ports. Set “USB
Select” in “Input Select” to “Front” or “Rear” to select the active
USB port (see page 83).
• This unit supports USB mass storage class or USB MTP devices using
FAT 16 or FAT 32.
• Only the first partition is displayed in the GUI menu. You cannot select
files in other partitions.
• Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per directory are
recognized.
• Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the requirements.
• Some WAV, MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files may not be playable or
may be noisy when played.
• When you connect your USB storage device or USB portable audio player,
there may be an about 10 seconds delay.
y
• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at the bottom
of the playback information screen.
• You can use
A
b / a to skip backward/forward and
A
h / s to
start/stop playback independently from the menu in the video monitor.
• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the “Play
Style” parameters in “NET/USB” (see page 83).
• You can set the front panel display mode by using the “Scroll” parameter
in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 93).
Using the Internet Radio
Notes
Using a USB storage device or a USB
portable audio player
Notes
Using Network/USB features
70 En
Use this feature to access the desired music sources (WAV, MP3 and
WMA files on the connected PC, MCX-2000 or USB storage
devices and Internet Radio stations) directly. You can preset 8 items
in each sub input sources.
■ Assigning the items to the numeric button (1-8)
1 Press
3
NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as the input
source.
2 Select a desired music source you want to assign to
the numeric button (1-8) (B), and then play back the
source.
See page 67 for details.
3 Press
0
MEMORY.
This unit in the memory preset mode. The MEMORY indicator
flashes and following message appears in the video monitor
and front panel display.
y
When you do not complete each of the following steps within 10 seconds,
the memory preset mode is automatically canceled. In this case, start over
from step 3.
4 Press desired numeric buttons (1-8) (B).
The number of the selected numeric button appears in the video
monitor or front panel display.
5 Press
9
ENTER or
0
MEMORY to confirm the
preset.
■ Select an item by using numeric buttons (1-8)
(
B
)
1 Press
3
NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as the input
source.
2 Select the desired sub input source.
3 Press one of the numeric button (1-8) (B) which the
desired item is assigned to select the item as the
input source.
The selected preset number appears in the front panel display,
and this unit starts the playback of the source assigned to the
selected numeric button.
• “Empty Memory!” appears in the front panel display and the short
message display when you press the numeric button (1-8) (B) to
which no items are assigned.
• This unit does not recall the correct item assigned to the selected
numeric button (1-8) (B) in the following cases:
– the connected USB device is incorrect.
– the PC or MCX-2000 which stores the selected item is turned off or
disconnected from the network.
– the selected Internet Radio station is temporary unavailable or out
of service.
– the directory of the selected item has been changed.
y
This unit stores the relative position of the preset items in a directory or
playlist, and does not recall the correct item by using numeric buttons
(1-8) (B) if you add or delete music files to or from the same directory
or playlist as the preset items. In such cases, preset the desired item to
the numeric buttons (1-8) (B) again.
We recommend the following methods:
PC server/MCX-2000
Create eight playlists which contain the desired items, and then preset
the top item of each playlist to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B). When
you change the items which are preset to the numeric buttons (1-8)
(B), replace the registered items in the playlist with the desired items
without deleting the playlist.
USB storage devices
Create eight directories which contain the desired items in a directory
beside the directory which contains all music files, and then preset the
top item of each directory to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B). When you
change the items which are preset to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B),
replace the items in the directory to the desired items without deleting
the directory.
Using shortcut buttons
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode
selector on the remote control to
F
SOURCE.
MEMORY
TUNERMULTI CHPHONOCDCD-RDVDDTVDVRVCR
MD
TAPE
BD
HD DVD
CBL
SAT
V-AUX
DOCK
NET
USB
-: PC/MCX
FlashesPreset number
MEMORY
TUNERMULTI CHPHONOCDCD-RDVDDTVDVRVCR
MD
TAPE
BD
HD DVD
CBL
SAT
V-AUX
DOCK
NET
USB
1: PC/MCX
FlashesSelected preset number
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode
selector on the remote control to
F
SOURCE.
Notes
TUNERMULTI CHPHONOCDCD-RDVDDTVDVRVCR
MD
TAPE
BD
HD DVD
CBL
SAT
V-AUX
DOCK
NET
USB
1: PC/MCX
Selected preset number
Advanced Operation
Advanced sound configurations ........................................................ 72
Selecting decoders ................................................................................................................... 72
Playing back sources with the THX Surround modes ............................................................. 73
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu .................................................. 74
GUI menu overview ................................................................................................................ 76
Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu) ............................................................................... 77
Input Select .............................................................................................................................. 81
Manual Setup (Basic) .............................................................................................................. 83
Manual Setup (Volume) ........................................................................................................... 86
Manual Setup (Sound) ............................................................................................................. 86
Manual Setup (Video) ............................................................................................................. 89
Manual Setup (Multi Zone) ..................................................................................................... 91
Manual Setup (Network) ......................................................................................................... 92
Manual Setup (Option) ............................................................................................................ 93
Signal Info. (Input signal information) .................................................................................... 95
Language ................................................................................................................................. 95
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory) ........... 96
Saving the current system settings .......................................................................................... 96
Loading the stored system settings .......................................................................................... 98
Using examples ....................................................................................................................... 99
Controlling this unit by using the Web browser
(Web Control Center) ..................................................................... 101
Remote control features .................................................................... 102
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components .................................................................. 102
Customizing the remote control ............................................................................................ 104
Setting the backlight mode of the remote control (LIGHT) .................................................. 104
Setting remote control codes (P-SET) ................................................................................... 104
Programming codes from other remote controls (LEARN) .................................................. 105
Changing source names in the display window (RNAME) .................................................. 106
Macro programming features ................................................................................................ 107
Clearing configurations ......................................................................................................... 109
Simplified remote control ...................................................................................................... 110
Using multi-zone configuration ........................................................ 111
Step1: Planning the multi-zone system ................................................................................. 111
Step2: Connecting the speakers, external amplifiers, and/or other components ................... 112
Step3: Setting the zone parameter ......................................................................................... 116
Controlling Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 .................................................................................. 116
Using the party mode ............................................................................................................ 118
Advanced setup ................................................................................. 119
Using the advanced setup menu ............................................................................................ 119
Advanced Operation
Advanced sound configurations
72 En
■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources
(surround decode mode)
Use this feature to play back sources with selected decoders. You
can play back 2-channel sources on multi-channels.
Set the operation mode selector to
F
AMP and then
press
Q
SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the remote
control to select the surround decode mode.
You can select desired surround decoder modes depending on the
type of source you are playing and your personal preference.
y
You can select the desired decoder and adjust the decoder parameter settings by using
GUI menu. See page 78 for details.
■ Decoder descriptions
y
When you select the surround decode mode for the multi-channel digital sources, this
unit automatically selects the corresponding decoder for each source.
■ Selecting decoders used with sound field
programs
Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with MOVIE
sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”) or THX Surround
mode. Use “Decoder Type” parameter in “Stereo/Surround” to set
the desired decoder (see page 78).
Available decoders (Decoder Type)
For MOVIE sound field programs (see page 58)
Choices: PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema
For THX Cinema mode
Choices: Pro Logic, PLIIx Movie (PL II Movie), Neo:6
Cinema, Off
For THX Music mode
Choices: Pro Logic, PLIIx Music (PL II Music), Neo:6 Music,
Off
For THX Games mode
Choices: Pro Logic, PL II Game, Neo:6 Cinema, Off
When you select “Decoder Type” to “Off” in the THX Surround mode, this unit
activates the decoder corresponding to the input source.
■ Selecting decoders for multi-channel sources
If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature to enjoy
6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby
Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders.
1 Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then
press NEXTD SUR. on the remote control
repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel
playback.
2 Press 9l / h repeatedly to select a decoder while
the name of the decoder is displayed when you
select other than “AUTO” or “OFF”.
y
Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when this unit cannot detect
the signal flag encoded to the input sources correctly.
Advanced sound configurations
Selecting decoders
Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources.
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” is set to
“None” or using headphones (see page 84).
PLIIx Music
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources.
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” is set to
“None” or using headphones (see page 84).
PLIIx Game
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The
Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” is set to “None”
or using headphones (see page 84).
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music sources.
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources.
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” is set to
“None” or using headphones (see page 84).
Decoder description
Name of the
decoder
(Decoder Type)
PLIIx Music
PLII Music
Notes
Choice Functions
AUTO
Activates the optimum decoder to play back signals
in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit recognizes a
signal flag being input.
Decoders
(PLIIx Movie,
PLIIx Music,
EX/ES, EX)
Use this feature to activate the desired decoders for
the playback of multi-channel sources manually.
OFF
Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1
channels.
Advanced sound configurations
73 En
Advanced
Operation
• The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the speakers and the input
sources.
• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases:
– when “Surround” (see page 84) or “Surround Back” (see page 84) is set to “None”.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is being played.
– when the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel
signals.
– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– when this unit is in the stereo playback, 11ch Enhancer (see page 59) or Pure Direct
(see page 61) mode.
– when “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (see page 120).
Use this feature to play back sources with the accurate surround
processing programs compliant with the THX specifications.
Rotate
I
PROGRAM (or set the operation mode selector
to FAMP and then press QTHX repeatedly) to select
the desired THX Surround mode.
You can select the THX Surround mode for movies, music, or
games.
■ For 2-channel sources
You can select the following THX Surround programs.
y
When this unit is in the THX Cinema, THX Music, or THX Games mode, you can
select the desired surround decoder (see page 72).
■ For multi-channel sources
You can select the following THX Surround programs.
y
To optimize the speaker settings for the THX Surround modes, set the parameters in
“THX Set” (see page 83) appropriately.
Notes
Playing back sources with the THX
Surround modes
Cinema
THX Surround mode for the 2-channel movie sources. This unit decodes
the sources by the selected decoder.
Music
THX Surround mode for the 2-channel music sources. This unit decodes
the sources by the selected decoder before THX processing.
Games
THX Surround mode for the 2-channel game audio. This unit decodes the
sources by the selected decoder before THX processing.
Ultra2 Cinema
Surround EX
Cinema
THX Surround modes for the multi-channel movie sources. When this
unit activates the Dolby Digital EX decoder (see left), this unit
automatically selects the THX Surround EX mode, and when this unit
activates the decoders for 6.1/7.1-channel playback or when “Surround
Back” is set to “Large x1”, “Small x1”, or “None” (see page 84), this unit
automatically selects the THX Cinema mode.
Ultra2 Music
Music
THX Surround mode for the multi-channel music sources.
When “Surround Back” is set to “Large x1”, “Small x1”, or “None” (see
page 84), this unit automatically selects the THX Music mode.
Ultra2 Games
Games
THX Surround mode for the multi-channel game audio.
When “Surround Back” is set to “Large x1”, “Small x1”, or “None” (see
page 84), this unit automatically selects the THX Games mode.
System Memory
You can store the settings of this unit optimized for the THX
Surround modes and recall then easily by using the system
memory feature. See page 96 for details.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
74 En
DSP-Z11 GUI menu tree
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Stereo/Surround
☞ P. 77
Input Select
☞ P. 81
Manual Setup
TUNER
MULTI CH
PHONO
CD
CD-R
MD/TAPE
BD/HD DVD
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
V-AUX
DOCK
NET/USB
Adaptive DRC
Adaptive DSP Lvl
Max Volume
Initial Volume
Muting Type
LFE Level
Dynamic Range
S-Wave Control
Parametric EQ
Tone Control
Lipsync
Pure Direct
Channel Mute
Conversion
HDMI Processing
Component I/P
HDMI Resolution
HDMI Aspect
Short Message
On Screen
Position
Wall Paper
Test Tone
THX Set
Speaker Set
Speaker Distance
Speaker Level
Vo l u m e
☞ P. 86
Sound
☞ P. 86
Video
☞ P. 89
Basic
☞ P. 83
Speakers
Headphones
Speakers
Headphones
Control
Bass
Treble
Auto Bypass
HDMI Auto
Auto
Manual
THX Ultra2 SWFR
Bndry Gain Comp
SB Speaker Dist.
THX Loudness Plus
Front
Center
Surround
Surround Back
Front Presence
Rear Presence
Subwoofer Configuration
Phase
Bass Out
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
75 En
Advanced
Operation
Auto Setup ☞ P. 42
System Memory
☞ P. 96
Signal Info.
☞ P. 95
Multi Zone
☞ P. 91
Network
☞ P. 92
Option
☞ P. 93
Main
Zone2
Zone3
Zone4
Audio Info.
Video Info.
English
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
Language
☞ P. 95
Speaker B
Zone SP Assign
Party Mode Set
Zone2 Set
Zone3 Set
Zone4 Set
Zone OSD
Configuration
Information
Front Panel Disp.
iPod
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
EXTD Surround
Memory Guard
HDMI Set
Trigger Output
Main Load
Main Save
Main Rename
Zone2 Load
Zone2 Save
Zone2 Rename
Zone3 Load
Zone3 Save
Zone3 Rename
Zone4 Load
Zone4 Save
Zone4 Rename
Zone2 Volume
Zone2 Max Vol.
Zone2 Initial Vol.
Zone2 Balance
Zone2 Mono
Muting Type
Zone3 Volume
Zone3 Max Vol.
Zone3 Initial Vol.
Zone3 Balance
Zone3 Mono
Muting Type
Zone4 Volume
Zone4 Max Vol.
Zone4 Initial Vol.
Zone4 Balance
Zone4 Mono
Muting Type
Trigger1
Trigger2
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
76 En
This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) menu that helps you to control the amplifier function of this unit. With the
GUI menu, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit.
■ Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu)
Use this feature to select the sound field programs and customize the program parameter settings (see page 77).
■ Input Select (Input select menu)
Use this feature to select the input source and customize the parameters of each input source (see page 81).
■ Manual Setup (Manual setup menu)
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Volume (Volume menu)
See page 86 for details.
Sound (Sound menu)
See page 86 for details.
Video (Video menu)
See page 89 for details.
Basic (Basic menu)
See page 83 for details.
Multi Zone (Multi-zone menu)
See page 91 for details.
Network (Network and USB menu)
See page 92 for details.
Option (Option menu)
See page 93 for details.
■ Auto Setup (Automatic setup menu)
Use this feature to run the automatic setup and specify which speaker parameters to be adjusted (see page 42).
■ System Memory (System memory menu)
Use this feature to store and recall various settings of this unit (see page 96).
■ Signal Info. (Signal information)
Use this feature to check audio and video signal information (see page 95).
■ Language (GUI language menu)
Use this feature to select the language of your choice that appears in the GUI menu of this unit (see page 95).
y
• You can also select the GUI language using “LANGUAGE” parameter in “Advanced setup” in the front panel display (see page 120).
• See page 53 for details about the basic operations in GUI menu.
• Refer to the “Graphical user interface (GUI) menu” on page 74 for the complete menu structure.
GUI menu overview
Stereo/Surround
Input Select
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Volume
Sound
Video
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
77 En
Advanced
Operation
Use this feature to select the sound field programs (see page 54), the
surround decode mode, the THX Surround mode, or the
“STRAIGHT” mode (see page 60), and adjust the parameters of
each program.
■ Basic configuration of sound field programs
Each sound field program has some parameters defining the
characteristics of the program. To customize the selected sound
field program, adjust “DSP Level” and/or “Dialogue Lift” first, and
then try other parameters.
Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound field
programs (DSP Level)
Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect sounds) to the
original source sound to create sound field in the listening room.
Use the “DSP Level” parameter to adjust the level of the effect
sounds.
Adjust “DSP Level” as follows:
Increase the value of “DSP Level” when
• the effect sound of the selected sound field program is too
weak.
• you cannot recognize any difference between the sound field
programs.
Decrease the value of “DSP Level” when
• the sound is vague.
• you feel that the additional sound effect is excessive.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
Adjusting the vertical dialogue position
(Dialogue Lift)
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the dialogues in
movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is at the center of the
video monitor screen.
If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video monitor
screen, increase the value of “Dialogue Lift”.
Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the highest
position.
• “Dialogue Lift” is available when “Front Presence” is set to “Yes” (see page 84) and
headphones are not connected.
• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial dialogue position.
Stereo/Surround
(Stereo/Surround menu)
The DSP effect
sound level is low
The DSP effect sound
level is high
Notes
The ideal
dialogue
position
Move up to the ideal dialogue position
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
78 En
■ Sound field parameter descriptions
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not
all of the following parameters are found in every program.
Sound field
parameter
Features
Decoder Type
Decoder type. Selects the decoder used with the SUR. DECODE, THX, or MOVIE programs. See page 72 for details.
Init. Delay
Sur. Init.Delay
SB. Init. Delay
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the apparent size of the sound field by adjusting the
delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the smaller the sound field seems to the
listener.
y
When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding room size parameters likewise. This adjustment
is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP programs.
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (Init. Delay)
1 to 49 ms (Sur. Init. Delay and SB Init. Delay)
Room Size
Sur. Room Size
SB. Room Size
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the sound field. The larger the value, the larger
the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the
apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
y
When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment
is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP programs.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Level
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Time Time Time
Source sound
Early
reflections
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Sound source
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
79 En
Advanced
Operation
Liveness
Sur. Liveness
SB. Liveness
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the
early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than
in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly
reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.
Control range: 0 to 10
Rev. Time
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This
changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time to get more sustaining
reverberation sound, and set a shorter time to get articulate sound.
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
Rev. Delay
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound.
The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic
environment.
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
Sound field
parameter
Features
Source sound
Level
Level
Level
Dead
Live
Time
Time Time
Small reflected
sound
Large reflected
sound
Small value = 0 Large value = 10
Reverberation
ReverberationSource sound
Rev. Time
Rev. Time Rev. Time
Sound source
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s
Early reflections
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
(dB)
Level
Source sound
Reverberation
Rev. Time
Rev. Delay
Time
60 dB
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
80 En
■ Stereo program parameter descriptions
■ Compressed Music Enhancer mode parameter descriptions
■ Decoder parameter descriptions
Rev. Level
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.
Control range: 0 to 100%
Sound field
parameter
Features
Direct
(“2ch Stereo” only)
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog
sources.
Choices: Auto, Off
y
• Select “Auto” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to “BYPASS” (see
page 61).
• Select “Off” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to “BYPASS”.
• When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases:
– “Bass Out” is set to “Front & SWFR” (see page 85).
– “Front” is set to “Small” (see page 84) and “Bass Out” is set to “SWFR” (see page 85).
Center Level
Surround L Level
Surround R Level
Sur.Back L Level
Sur.Back R Level
F.PRNS L Level
F.PRNS R Level
R.PRNS L Level
R.PRNS R Level
(“11ch Stereo” only)
11-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right levels. Adjusts the volume level of
each channel in the 11-channel stereo mode. The available parameters differ depending on the speaker settings.
Control range: 0 to 100%
The Compressed
Music Enhancer
mode
Features
Level
(“Straight Enhancer”
and “11ch Enhancer”
only)
Straight enhancer or 11-channel enhancer effect level. Select “High” or “Low” to adjust the effect for the high-frequency.
Choices: High, Low
Decoder parameter Features
Panorama
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII Music”
only)
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front
speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: Off, On
Center Width
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII Music”
only)
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center
speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left
and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
Sound field
parameter
Features
Source sound
Level
Rev. Level
Time
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
81 En
Advanced
Operation
■ Initialize (Program parameters initialization)
Use this feature to initialize the parameter of the selected sound field program.
Choices: No, Yes
• Select “Yes” and then press 9ENTER to set the program parameters to the factory default settings.
• Select “No” (or press 9l) to cancel the program parameter initialization.
y
Use “DSP PARAM” of “INITIALIZE” in “Advanced setup” to initialize the parameters of all sound field programs (see page 120).
Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input
signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the signal input at
each input source.
• Some parameters described above may not be available for all input sources and some
parameters are only available for specific input sources.
• You can set “Volume Trim” for each sub input source separately.
• The “Play Style” setting is effective to both “PC/MCX” and”USB”.
■ I/O Assignment
(Input/output assignment)
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the
component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not
correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to
reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more
components.
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component by using the
D
INPUT selector (or the
input selector buttons (3)).
Example 1: Assigning the CD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL
jack to “VCR”.
1 Select “Input Select” in the GUI menu and then select
“VCR”.
2 Select “I/O Assignment” and then “Coaxial Input”.
3 Select “
5
CD”.
Dimension
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII Music”
only)
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Initial setting: STD (standard)
Center Image
(“Neo:6 Music” only)
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the
center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to
1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker)
Initial setting: 0.3
Decoder parameter Features
Rev. Level
Dialogue Lift
Initialize No
Yes
Input Select
Input source Sub input source Parameter
TUNER
—
Volume Trim
Rename
MULTI CH
—
Volume Trim
Rename
Multi CH Assign
BGV
PHONO
CD
CD-R
MD/TAPE
BD/HD DVD
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
—
I/O Assignment
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename
V-AUX
—
I/O Assignment
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename
DOCK
—
Volume Trim
Rename
NET/USB PC/MCX
Volume Trim
Play Style
NET RADIO
Volume Trim
USB
USB Select
Volume Trim
Play Style
Notes
I/O Assignment
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Coaxial Input
Optical Input
Optical Output
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
82 En
Example 2: Clearing a jack assignment.
1 Select “Input Select” and then select the desired
input source (“DVD”, etc.).
2 Select “I/O Assignment” and then select the desired
jack assignment (“Coaxial Input”, “Optical Input”,
“Optical Output”, “Analog I/O”, “Component Video”,
or “HDMI”).
3 Select “None” and then press
9
ENTER to clear the
assignment.
• “None” appears in the GUI when any input source is not assigned to the input/output
jack.
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority
is given to signals input at the COAXIAL jack.
■ Audio Select (Audio input jack select)
Use this feature to select the type of the input jack you want to use.
y
• You can also select the audio input jack by pressing
F
AUDIO SELECT (or
O
AUDIO SEL). See page 52 for details.
• You can set the default audio input jack select of this unit by using “Audio Select” in
“Option” (see page 93).
This feature is not available when no digital input jack (OPTICAL, COAXIAL and
HDMI) are assigned. In addition, “HDMI” is not available as an Audio input jack select
setting when the HDMI input jacks are not used. Use “I/O Assignment” in “Input
Select” to reassign the respective input jack.
■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)
Use this feature to switch the decoder mode. You can designate the
reassigned digital input jacks (see page 81) for digital audio signals.
■ Volume Trim (Volume trimming)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each input
source. This feature is useful if you want to balance the level of each
input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching
between input sources.
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
y
This parameter also affects the signals output at the ZONE OUT jacks.
You can only adjust the volume for the current input source using this setting.
■ Rename (Rename)
Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the GUI menu
or the front panel display menu. (“DVD” is used as the source
component in the following example.)
1 Press
9
l / h to place the _ (underscore) under the
space or character you want to edit.
2 Press
9
ENTER repeatedly to select a character type
(CAPITAL/SMALL/LATIN CAPITAL/LATIN SMALL/
FIGURE/MARK).
3 Press
9
k / n to select the character you want to use
and
9
l / h to move to the next one.
• You can use up to 9 characters for each memory.
•Press
9
n to change the character in the following order, or
press
9
k to go in the reverse order:
CAPITAL A to Z, space
SMALL a to z, space
LATIN CAPITAL Ä, Ö, Ü, etc., space
LATIN SMALL ä, ö, ü, etc., space
FIGURE 0 to 9, space
MARK !, #, %, &, etc., space
•Press
9
ENTER to switch between character types.
•Press
9
h repeatedly to select “RESET” to set the name of
the input source to the initial name.
• The character types you can select differ depending on the setting in
“Language” (see page 95).
• If you set “Language” to “ ”, you can also select Japanese characters.
4 Press
9
l / h repeatedly to select “OK” and press
9
ENTER when complete.
y
• Repeat steps 1 to 4 to rename each input.
• You can also change the name of the input source that appears in the display window
(4) on the remote control. Refer to “Changing source names in the display window
(RNAME)” on page 106.
You can only change the name of the current input source
(except for multi channel input sources) using this setting.
Notes
Choice Functions
Auto
Automatically selects input signals in the following
order:
(1) HDMI
(2) Digital signals
(3) Analog signals
HDMI
Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not
input, no sound is output.
Coax/Opt
Automatically selects input signals in the following
order:
(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack.
(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack.
When no signals are input, no sound is output.
Analog
Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are
input, no sound is output.
Note
Choice Functions
Auto
Automatically detects digital audio signal input types and
selects the appropriate decoder.
DTS
Activates the DTS decoder when digital audio signals are
input.
Note
Notes
Note
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename
CAPITAL
DVD
OK RESET
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
83 En
Advanced
Operation
■ Multi CH Assign (Multi channel assignment)
Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input into the
center, subwoofer and surround channels when a source component
is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Input Channels (Input channels)
Use this setting to select the number of channels input from an
external decoder (see page 35).
Depending on the settings of the zone configuration, no sound is output at the surround
back speakers even if you set “Input Channels” to “8ch”. In this case, select “6ch” and
set the audio output setting of the source component to 6 channels.
Front Input
(Front left and right channels input jacks)
If you selected “8ch” in “Input Channels”, you can select analog
jacks at which front left and right channel signals from an external
decoder will be input.
Choices: CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE, BD/HD DVD, DVD, DTV,
CBL/SAT, DVR, VCR, V-AUX
If you have renamed an input source in “Rename” (see page 82), the name of the input
source appears in the choices of this parameter.
■ BGV (Back ground video)
Use this feature to select the video source played in the background
of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
If you have renamed an input source in “Rename” (see page 82), the name of the input
source appears in the choices of this parameter.
■ Play Style (Playback styles)
Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to your
preference. You can shuffle songs in a random order or repeat one
specific song or a sequence of songs.
Repeat (Repeat)
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of
songs.
• If “Repeat” is set to “Single”, the setting will be reset to “Off” when this unit is
turned off.
• When you set “BGV” to “Last”, you can select the background video source by using
the remote control only.
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random
order.
■ USB Select (USB port select)
Selects the component connected to the front or rear USB port as
the input source (see page 37).
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker setting.
y
• Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set automatically when you
run “Auto Setup”. You can use the basic menu to make further adjustments, but we
recommend running “Auto Setup” first.
• You can reset these parameters by performing the “Auto Setup” procedure (see
page 42).
• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the
volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the
maximum.
■ Test Tone (Test tone)
Turns the test tone output on or off for “Speaker Set”, “Speaker
Distance”, and “Speaker Level” settings.
• Loud test tones will be output when “On” is selected. In this case, make sure no
children are present in the listening room.
• This function is automatically turned off if you exit “Basic”.
■ THX Set (THX settings)
Use this feature to set the parameters to optimize the THX Surround
modes (see page 73).
THX Ultra2 SWFR (THX Ultra2 subwoofer setting)
Use this feature to select whether the connected subwoofers are the
THX Ultra2 certified subwoofers.
Choice Description
6ch
Select “6ch” the connected component outputs discrete
6-channel audio signals.
8ch
Select “8ch” the connected component outputs discrete
8-channel audio signals. Also set “Front Input” (see
below) to the analog audio jacks at which the front left
and right channel signals output from the connected
component are input.
Note
Note
Choice Functions
BD/HD DVD,
DTV, CBL/SAT,
DVD, DVR, VCR,
V-AUX
Selects the corresponding input source as the background
video source.
Last
Automatically selects the last selected video source as the
background video source.
Off
Does not play the video source in the background.
Note
Choice Functions
Off
Deactivates the repeat function.
Single
Repeats one song. “ ” appears in the top right corner
of the playback status screen.
All
Repeats a sequence of songs. “ ” appears in the top
right corner of the playback status screen.
Notes
Choice Functions
Off
Deactivates the shuffle function.
On
Play songs or albums in a random order. “ ” appears
in the top right corner of the playback status screen.
Choice Functions
Front
Selects the component connected to the front USB port as
the input source.
Rear
Selects the component connected to the rear USB port as
the input source.
Manual Setup (Basic)
Choice Functions
Off
This unit does not output the test tone for the “Speaker
Set”, “Speaker Level”, and “Speaker Distance” settings.
On
This unit outputs the test tone for the “Speaker Set”,
“Speaker Level”, and “Speaker Distance” settings.
While “Test Tone” is set to “On”, the volume level is
automatically set to 0 dB.
Notes
Choice Descriptions
Yes
Select this setting when the connected subwoofers are the
THX Ultra2 certified subwoofers.
No
Select this setting when the connected subwoofers are not
the THX Ultra2 certified subwoofers.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
84 En
When “THX Ultra2 SWFR” is set to “No”, you cannot select “Bndry Gain Comp” is
automatically set to “Off”.
Bndry Gain Comp (Boundary gain compensation)
Use this feature to improve boomy bass when the listening position
is closer to the rear wall.
SB Speaker Dist. (Surround back speaker distance)
Use this feature to set the distance between the left surround back
speaker and right surround back speaker.
The unit used in this parameter differs depending on the setting of “Unit” in “Speaker
Distance” (see page 85).
THX Loudness Plus (Loudness plus setting)
THX Loudness Plus function compensates for the total and spatial
shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by intelligently
adjusting ambient surround channel levels and frequency response.
Use this feature to select whether this unit automatically activates
the THX Loudness Plus function in the THX Surround modes.
■ Speaker Set (Speaker settings)
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these
settings according to your preference.
Front (Front speakers)
When “Bass Out” is set to “Front” (see page 85), you can select only “Large” in
“Front”. If the value of “Front” is set to other than “Large” in advance, this unit change
the value to “Large” automatically.
Center (Center speaker)
Surround (Surround left/right speakers)
y
See page 23 for the connection information of the surround speakers.
Surround Back
(Surround back left/right speakers)
y
See page 23 for the connection information of the surround speakers.
Cross Over (Cross over)
Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of the speaker(s)
that is set to “Small”. All frequencies below the selected frequency
will be sent to the subwoofers or to the speakers set to “Large” in
“Speaker Set” (see pages 84).
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz,
160Hz, 200Hz
y
If your subwoofers can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the
volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the
maximum.
Front Presence (Front presence speakers)
Use this feature if you want to use the front presence speakers
connected to this unit.
Note
Choice Descriptions
Off
Select this setting when you do not want to use the
boundary gain compensation feature.
On
Select this setting to activate the boundary gain
compensation feature.
Choice Descriptions
Under 1ft
(Under 0.3m)
Select this setting when the distance between the two
surround back speakers is less than 0.3 m (1 foot).
1 – 4ft (0.3-1.2m)
Select this setting when the distance between the two
surround back speakers is 0.3 m to 1.2 m (1 foot to 4
feet).
Over 4ft
(over 1.2m)
Select this setting when the distance between the two
surround back speakers is over 1.2 m (4 feet).
Note
Choice Descriptions
Off
Deactivates the Loudness Plus function.
On
Activates the Loudness Plus function in the THX
Surround modes.
Measure for the speaker size
The woofer section of a speaker is
– 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large
– smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small
y
THX Ltd. recommends you that you set “Front”, “Center”, “Surround”, and
“Surround Back” to “Small” and “Cross Over” to “80Hz (THX)”.
To select the crossover frequency of the speaker(s) manually, select “Small” and
then set “Cross Over” (see page 84).
Choice Descriptions
Large
Select this setting when the front speakers are large.
Small
Select this setting when the front speakers are small.
Note
Choice Descriptions
Large
Select this setting when the center speaker is large.
Small
Select this setting when the center speaker is small.
None
Select this setting when you do not use the center
speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the
front left and right speakers.
Choice Descriptions
Large
Select this setting when the surround speakers are large.
Small
Select this setting when the surround speakers are small.
None
Select this setting when you do not use the surround
speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 60), and “Surround Back” is
automatically set to “None”.
Choice Descriptions
Large x1
Select this setting when the single surround back speaker
is large.
Large x2
Select this setting when the surround back left and right
speakers are large.
Small x1
Select this setting when the single surround back speaker
is small.
Small x2
Select this setting when the surround back left and right
speakers are small.
None
Select this setting when you do not use the surround back
speakers. The surround back channel signals are directed
to the surround left and right speakers.
Choice Descriptions
Yes
Select this setting when you use the front presence
speakers.
None
Select this setting when you do not use the front presence
speakers. “Rear Presence” is automatically set to “None”.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
85 En
Advanced
Operation
• If you set “Front Presence” to “None”, you cannot activate the CINEMA DSP HD³
mode (see page 60).
• “Dialogue Lift” is available when “Front Presence” is set to “Yes” and headphones
are not connected.
Rear Presence (Rear presence speakers)
Use this feature if you want to use the rear presence speakers
connected to this unit.
Subwoofer (Subwoofer)
Configuration (Subwoofer configuration)
Use this feature to select the configuration of the subwoofers
(see page 25).
y
If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set
the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to
the maximum.
Phase (Subwoofer phase)
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofers if bass
sounds are lacking or unclear.
Bass Out (Bass out)
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-
frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
THX Ltd. recommends that “Bass Out” to “SWFR”.
LFE signals output
Low-frequency signals output
*1 Output(s) the low-frequency signals of the front channels and other
speakers set to “Small”.
*2 Always output the low-frequency signals of the front channels.
*3 Output the low-frequency signals if the speakers are set to “Large”.
*4 Outputs the low-frequency signals of the speakers set to “Small” or
“None”.
■ Speaker Distance (Speaker distance)
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the
delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be
the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not
possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must
be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive
at the listening position at the same time.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Control step: 0.05 m (0.2 ft)
y
If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the
volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the
maximum.
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers.
• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SUR.BACK
SINGLE jack, and adjust the distance in “Surround Back L”.
Unit (Unit)
Selects the unit for displaying the values of “Speaker Distance”
parameter.
Notes
Choice Descriptions
Yes
Select this setting when you use the rear presence
speakers.
None
Select this setting when you do not use the rear presence
speakers.
Choice Descriptions
Front & Rear
Select this setting when you place the subwoofers to
the front and rear of the listening room.
Stereo
Select this setting when you place the subwoofers to
the left and right of the listening room.
Monaural
Select this setting when you use a single subwoofer.
None
Select this setting when you do not use a subwoofer.
Choice Functions
Normal
Does not change the phase of your subwoofers.
L Reverse
Sets the phase of the left (or front) subwoofer to
reverse.
R Reverse
Sets the phase of the right (or rear) subwoofer to
reverse.
L&R Reverse
Sets the phase of the both subwoofers to reverse.
Choice
Subwoofers and speakers
Subwoofers
Front
speakers
Other
speakers
Front &
SWFR
Output No output No output
SWFR
Output No output No output
Front
No output Output No output
Choice
Subwoofers and speakers
Subwoofers
Front
speakers
Other
speakers
Front &
SWFR
*1 *2 *3
SWFR
*4 *3 *3
Front
No output *1 *3
Speaker Distance Adjusted speaker
Front L
Front left speaker
Front R
Front right speaker
Center
Center speaker
Surround L
Surround left speaker
Surround R
Surround right speaker
Surround Back L
Surround back left speaker
Surround Back R
Surround back right speaker
Front Presence L
Front presence left speaker
Front Presence R
Front presence right speaker
Rear Presence L
Rear presence left speaker
Rear Presence R
Rear presence right speaker
Subwoofer L
Subwoofer left
Subwoofer R
Subwoofer right
Notes
Choice Functions
Meter (m)
Adjusts speaker distances in meters.
Feet (ft)
Adjusts speaker distances in feet.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
86 En
■ Speaker Level (Speaker level)
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels between the
front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in
“Speaker Set” (see page 84).
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
y
• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the
volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the
maximum.
• If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s length and point
upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB
scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers.
• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SUR.BACK
SINGLE jack, and adjust the balance in “Surround Back L”.
• The setting of “Speaker Level” changes depending on the setting of “PEQ Select” in
“Manual Setup” (see page 87).
Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume settings.
Adaptive DRC (Adaptive dynamic range control)
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the
volume level. This feature is useful when you are listening at lower
volumes or at night. When “Adaptive DRC” is set to “Auto”, this
unit controls the dynamic range as follows:
– If the VOLUME setting is low: the dynamic range is narrow
– If the VOLUME setting is high: the dynamic range is wide
y
• You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal sources by using
“Dynamic Range” in “Sound” (see page 87).
• This function is also useful for listening with your headphones.
• The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function when this unit is in the
THX Surround modes (see page 73) or Pure Direct mode (see page 61).
• If you set “Direct” in “2ch Stereo” to “Auto” (see page 80) and this unit is in the 2ch
Stereo mode, the adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function in some
cases.
Adaptive DSP Lvl (Adaptive DSP effect level)
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP effect level
(see page 77) automatically in conjunction with the volume level.
Even if you set “Adaptive DSP Lvl” to “Auto”, this unit does not change but
fine-tunes the specified value of “DSP Level” (see page 77).
Max Volume (Maximum volume)
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the main zone.
This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by mistake.
For example, the original volume range is –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB.
However, when “Max Volume” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range
becomes –80.0 dB to –5.0 dB.
Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
Initial Volume (Initial volume)
Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone when the
power of this unit is turned on.
Choices: Off, Mute, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level is automatically set to
0 dB regardless of the current “Max Volume” setting.
• The “Max Volume” setting takes priority over the initial volume setting. For example,
if “Initial Volume” is set to –20.0 dB and “Max Volume” is set to –30.0 dB, the
volume level is automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit
next time.
Muting Type (Muting type)
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the
output volume (see page 52).
Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters.
■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level)
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the
LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-
frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes.
This setting is effective only when this unit decodes bitstream
signals.
Control range: –20.0 to 0.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
Speaker Level Adjusted speaker
Front L
Front left speaker
Front R
Front right speaker
Center
Center speaker
Surround L
Surround left speaker
Surround R
Surround right speaker
Surround Back L
Surround back left speaker
Surround Back R
Surround back right speaker
Front Presence L
Front presence left speaker
Front Presence R
Front presence right speaker
Rear Presence L
Rear presence left speaker
Rear Presence R
Rear presence right speaker
Subwoofer L
Subwoofer left
Subwoofer R
Subwoofer right
Notes
Manual Setup (Volume)
Choice Functions
Auto
Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.
Off
Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.
Input level
Output level
Output level
Input level
AUTO
OFF
AUTO
OFF
VOLUME: low VOLUME: high
Notes
Choice Functions
Auto
Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction with the
volume level.
Off
Does not adjust the DSP effect level automatically.
Note
Notes
Choice Functions
Full
Mutes all the audio output.
–20dB
Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.
–40dB
Reduces the current volume by 40 dB.
Manual Setup (Sound)
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
87 En
Advanced
Operation
Speakers (Speaker low-frequency effect level)
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.
Headphones
(Headphone low-frequency effect level)
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of “Bass Out” (see page 85), some signals may not be output
at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks.
■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range)
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression
to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is
effective only when the unit is decoding bitstream signals.
Speakers (Speaker dynamic range)
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers.
Headphones (Headphone dynamic range)
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the headphones.
■ S-Wave Control (Standing wave control)
Use this menu to activate or deactivate the specially customized
parametric equalizer to reduce the effects of acoustic standing
waves in the listening room. See page 44 for details.
■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer)
Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer of each speaker.
PEQ Data Copy (Parametric equalizer data copy)
Use this feature to copy the result data of the automatic setup to the
manual configuration area. You can select the parametric equalizer
type applied to the copied result data of the automatic setup. See
page 46 for the descriptions of each parametric equalizer type.
PEQ Select (Parametric equalizer type select)
Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer type that applied
to the results of the automatic setup. See page 46 for the
descriptions of each parametric equalizer type.
• When you carry out the automatic setup, this unit automatically set “PEQ Select” to
“Natural”.
• “Speaker Level” settings (see page 86) also changes corresponding to the setting of
“PEQ Select”.
• This unit does not change the configurations of “Manual” even if you perform the
automatic setup.
Manual parametric equalizer configuration of each
speaker
Use this feature to adjust the tonal quality of each speaker. You can
copy the results of the automatic setup for the base of the manual
configuration by using “PEQ Data Copy”. Set “PEQ Select” to
“Manual” in advanced.
1 Press
9
k / n / l / h to select “Test Tone” or the
speaker you want to adjust.
Test Tone
Use this feature to select whether to turn on or off the test tone
output while you are adjusting the tonal quality of each
speaker.
Note
Choice Functions
MAX
Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic range.
STD
Adjusts the dynamic range to medium. When this unit is
decoding Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range
control is always active regardless of the instruction of
the input source signals.
MIN/AUTO
• MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to narrow when this
unit is decoding bitstream signals (except Dolby
TrueHD).
• AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range according to the
instruction of the input source signals when this unit is
decoding Dolby TrueHD signals.
Choice Functions
On
Activates the parametric equalizer.
Off
Deactivates the parametric equalizer.
Choice Descriptions
Flat → Manual
Copies the result of the automatic setup that the “Flat”
type parametric equalizer is applied to.
Front → Manual
Manual Copies the result of the automatic setup that the
“Front” type parametric equalizer is applied to.
Natural
→
Manual
Copies the result of the automatic setup that the
“Natural” type parametric equalizer is applied to.
Choice Descriptions
Manual Applies the manually configured parametric equalizer in
“Manual Setup”.
Flat
Applies the “Flat” type parametric equalizer.
Front
Applies the “Front” type parametric equalizer.
Natural
Applies the “Natural” type parametric equalizer.
Through
Does not use the parametric equalizer.
Notes
Choice Adjusted speaker
Front L
Front left speaker
Front R
Front right speaker
Center
Center speaker
Surround L
Surround left speaker
Surround R
Surround right speaker
Surround Back L
Surround back left speaker
Surround Back R
Surround back right speaker
Front Presence L
Front presence left speaker
Front Presence R
Front presence right speaker
Rear Presence L
Rear presence left speaker
Rear Presence R
Rear presence right speaker
Subwoofer L
Subwoofer left
Subwoofer R
Subwoofer right
Choice Functions
On
Outputs the test tone.
Off
Does not output the test tone.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
88 En
2 Press
9
h to access the settings window.
3 Press
9
k / n / l / h to select “PARAM” and then
press
9
ENTER to select a parameter from “Band”
(band), “Freq.” (frequency) or “Q” (Q factor).
y
You can adjust “Gain” (gain) with any parameter.
4 Press
9
n to select “EDIT” and press
9
ENTER to
access the edit window.
For more information on the parametric equalizer and each
parameter, see page 131.
The parameter selected in “PARAM” is highlighted.
• Press
9
l / h to adjust the parameter.
• Press
9
k / n to adjust the “Gain”.
• Press
9
ENTER to exit the edit window.
y
• When you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu as a graphic
equalizer.
• “Band #4”, “Band #5”, “Band #6”, and “Band #7” can adjust the frequencies
above of 500 Hz.
• When you select “Subwoofer L” or “Subwoofer R” in step 1 and “Band” in
step 3, you can adjust “Band #1”, “Band #2”, and “Band #3” only. In this case,
“Band #1”, “Band #2”, and “Band #3” can adjust the frequencies below of 250
Hz.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied with the
results.
y
If you want to reset all “Parametric EQ” parameter settings for the selected
speaker, select “RESET” and press 9ENTER.
6 Select “EXIT” and press
9
ENTER to exit from the
settings window.
■ Tone Control (Tone control)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble output to
your speakers or headphones.
Tone Control is not effective when:
– the Pure Direct mode (see page 61) is selected.
– one of the THX Surround mode is selected (see page 73).
– MULTI CH is selected as the input source.
Control (Tone control)
y
“Speaker” and “Headphone” adjustments are stored independently. The adjustments for
“Speaker” affects the front left/right, center, presence left/right speaker channels and
Subwoofer channel.
Bass (Bass control)
Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your speakers or
headphones.
Choices: 125 Hz, 350 Hz, 500 Hz
Control range: – 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Treble (Treble control)
Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your speakers
or headphones.
Choices: 2.5 kHz, 3.5 kHz, 8.0 kHz
Control range: – 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Auto Bypass (Auto bypass)
Use this feature to select whether the audio output bypasses the tone
control circuitry when “Treble” and “Bass” are set to 0 dB (see
page 61).
■ Lipsync (Audio and video synchronization)
Use this feature to adjust the audio and video synchronization.
HDMI Auto (HDMI automatic lip sync mode)
If the connected video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT jack
on this unit and compatible with the automatic audio and video
synchronization function (automatic lip sync), this unit adjusts the
audio and video synchronization automatically. Use this feature to
activate or deactivate the automatic lip sync.
Note
PEQ Data Copy
PEQ Select
Front L
Front R
Center
PARAM RESET
EDIT EXIT
Band/Gain
PEQ Data Copy
PEQ Select
Front L
Front R
Center
Band #1
Gain 0.0dB
Freq. 62.5Hz
Q 1.000
Choice Functions
Speaker
Adjust the bass/treble balance of your speakers.
Headphone
Adjust the bass/treble balance of your headphones.
Choice Functions
Auto
Automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry to
provide the purest signal possible when “Treble” and
“Bass” are set to 0 dB.
Off
Does not bypass the tone control circuitry.
+6
0
-6
Control
Bass
Treble
Auto Bypass
Speaker
Freq.: 350Hz
Gain: 0.0dB
+6
0
-6
Control
Bass
Treble
Auto Bypass
Speaker
Freq.: 3.5kHz
Gain: 0.0dB
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
89 En
Advanced
Operation
Auto (Automatic audio delay adjustment)
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and video
synchronization when you set “HDMI Auto” to “On”.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Control step: 1 ms
y
“offset” indicates the difference between the value of the audio delay that this unit sets
automatically and the value of the audio delay that you set in “HDMI Auto”. This unit
stores the value of “Offset” and applies the value to other automatic lip sync compatible
video monitors.
Manual (Manual audio delay adjustment)
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output manually to
synchronize audio with video images when you set “HDMI Auto”
to “Off”.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Control step: 1 ms
■ Pure Direct (Pure Direct)
Use this feature to select whether this unit outputs the video signals
when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode.
You cannot use the GUI menu while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode even if “Pure
Direct” is set to “Video On”.
■ Channel Mute (Channel mute)
Use this feature to mute specific speaker channels.
Mode (Mode)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the “Channel Mute” setting
for each speaker.
Each speaker settings
Select whether this unit mutes each speaker channel when you set
“Mode” to “Enable”.
Use this menu to adjust the video parameters.
Use the “VIDEO” in “INITIALIZE” to set the parameters in “Manual Setup (Video)”
(except “Short Message” and “On Screen”) to the factory presets (see page 120).
■ Conversion (Video conversion)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the video scaling as well as
the HDMI up-conversion of the analog video signals input at the
VIDEO, S VIDEO, and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
• For optimal video performance, THX Ltd. recommends that you set “Conversion” to
“Off” to allow video signals to pass through the system without processing (e.g.,
video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are output at the
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks without any processing).
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When
recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between
each component.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted into component
video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR.
• If “Conversion” is set to “Off”, the “Component I/P”, “HDMI Resolution”, “HDMI
Processing”, “HDMI Aspect”, and “Short Message” features are deactivated.
• Set “Conversion” to “On” to display the short message.
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line video signals
interchangeably.
• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution are
converted into the S-video or composite video signals and output at the S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• Even when “Conversion” is set to “On”, HDMI digital signals are not converted to
analog video signals.
• This unit cannot convert the signals input at the VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks and
displays the video images correctly depending on the input source component and the
source played on the component. In such cases, set “Conversion” to “Off”.
• When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a video game console)
are input, this unit does not display short messages in the video monitor even if
“Conversion” is set to “On”.
• When the analog component video signals with 480p/576p of resolution are input at
the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and the video monitor is connected to the VIDEO
MONITOR OUT or S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack on this unit, the GUI screen is
not displayed in the video monitor.
Choice Descriptions
Off
Select this setting if the connected video monitor is
compatible with the automatic lip sync. Use “Auto” to
make fine adjustments of the audio and video
synchronization.
On
Select this setting if the video monitor is not compatible
with the automatic lip sync or you do not want to use the
automatic lip sync. Use “Manual” to adjustment the
audio and video synchronization.
Choice Functions
Video Off
Does not output video signals.
Video On
Outputs video signals. For the better sound quality, this
unit only activates the limited video features.
Note
Choice Functions
Disable
Deactivates the “Channel Mute” function.
Enable
Activates the “Channel Mute” function.
Choice Functions
Mute On
Mutes the selected speaker channel.
Mute Off
Does not mute the selected speaker channel.
Channel Mute Speaker channel
Front L
Front left
Front R
Front right
Center
Center
Surround L
Surround left
Surround R
Surround right
Surround Back L
Surround back left
Surround Back R
Surround back right
Front Presence L
Front presence left speaker
Front Presence R
Front presence right speaker
Rear Presence L
Rear presence left speaker
Rear Presence R
Rear presence right speaker
Subwoofer L
Subwoofer left
Subwoofer R
Subwoofer right
Manual Setup (Video)
Note
Choice Functions
On
Converts composite, S-video, and component video
signals interchangeably and up-converts composite, S-
video, and component video signals to HDMI video
signals.
Off
Does not convert any signals.
Notes
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
90 En
■ HDMI Processing (HDMI video processing)
Use this feature to select whether this unit processes the video
signals input at the HDMI IN jacks.
■ Component I/P (Component interlace/
progressive conversion)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog interlace/
progressive conversion of the analog video signals input at the
composite video, S-video and component video jacks so that the
analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to
480p/576p are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks.
• If your video monitor does not support analog video signals with 480p/576p of
resolution, the GUI screen may not be displayed on your video monitor when
“Component I/P” is set to “On”. In such a case, set “INITIALIZE” in “Advanced
setup” parameter to “VIDEO” (see page 120).
• When you set “HDMI Processing” to “On”, you may not set “Component I/P” in
some cases.
■ HDMI Resolution
(HDMI video signal resolution)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI up-scaling of the
analog and HDMI video signals input at the composite video, S-
video and component video and HDMI IN jacks so that the up-
scaled video signals are output at the HDMI OUT jacks.
This unit up-scales the analog video signals as follows:
• 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) → 480p/576p, 1080i, 720p, or
1080p
• 480p/576p → 1080i, 720p, or 1080p
• 1080i → 480p/576p, 720p, 1080p
• 720p → 480p/576p, 1080i, 1080p
The input video signals may be down-scaled depending on the setting of “HDMI
Resolution”.
■ HDMI Aspect (HDMI aspect ratio)
Use this feature to select whether this unit converts the aspect ratio
of 4:3 video signals and outputs at the HDMI OUT jacks.
• When “HDMI Resolution” is set to “Through”, you cannot make any adjustments to
“HDMI Aspect”.
• If the aspect ratio of the input video source is other than 4:3, this unit automatically
ignores the setting of “HDMI Aspect”.
• When “HDMI Aspect” is set to “Smart Zoom”, the video images of the edge of the
video monitor are rather stretched.
■ Short Message (Short message display)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message display
displayed in the main zone video monitor function.
The short message display does not appear in the following cases:
– when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions are input
– when HDMI video signals are input
■ On Screen (On-screen display time)
Use this feature to set the time for which the iPod menu, or NET/
USB menu is displayed in the video monitor after you perform a
certain operation.
y
This setting is applied to the GUI menu in the main zone and OSD in Zone 2, Zone 3,
or Zone 4.
■ Position (GUI screen position)
Use this feature to adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the
GUI screen.
Control range: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right)
Choice Functions
Off
Select this setting when you do not want this unit to
process the video signals input at the HDMI IN jacks
even if “Conversion” is set to “On”.
On
Select this setting when you want this unit to process the
video signals input at the HDMI IN jacks when
“Conversion” is set to “On”.
Choice Functions
On
Activates the analog interlace/progressive up-conversion
of the analog video signals.
Off
Deactivates the analog interlace/progressive up-
conversion of the analog video signals.
Notes
Choice Functions
Through
Does not up-scale any video signals.
480p (or 576p),
1080i, 720p,
1080p
Up-scales video signals to 480p or 576p, 1080i, 720p, or
1080p of resolution.
Note
Choice Functions
Through
Does not make any adjustments to the aspect ratio for the
HDMI video signal sources.
16:9 Normal
Displays video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 on
your video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9. Black
stripes appear on the right and left sides as a result.
Smart Zoom
Fits video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 to your
video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9. The signals
are input with 720p, 1080i or 1080p of resolution, this
setting does not affect the video signals output at the
HDMI OUT jack.
Notes
Choice Functions
On
Activates the short message display function.
Off
Deactivates the short message display function.
Note
Choice Functions
Always
Displays the menu unceasingly during an operation.
10sec
Turns off the menu 10 seconds after you perform a
certain operation.
30sec
Turns off the menu 30 seconds after you perform a
certain operation.
:0
+
:0 //
Short Message
On Screen
Position
Wall Paper
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
91 En
Advanced
Operation
■ Wall Paper (Wall paper)
Use this feature to display the wall paper or gray background in
your video monitor when there is no video signal being input.
When “Conversion” is set to “Off”, no background is displayed even if “Wall Paper” is
set to other than “None”.
Use this menu to set the functions of the multi-zone configuration.
■ Speaker B (Speaker B setting)
Use this feature to select the location of the FRONT B speakers.
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on this unit, the sound is output from
both the headphones and the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals when
“Speaker B” is set to “ZoneB”.
• If a sound field program is selected when “Speaker B” is set to “ZoneB”, this unit
automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 60).
■ Zone SP Assign (Zone speaker assignment)
Use this feature to assign the speaker terminals for Zone 2, Zone 3,
and Zone 4. See page 116 for details.
■ Party Mode Set (Party mode settings)
The party mode enables you to play the same source in multiple
zones simultaneously (see page 118). Use “Party Mode Set” menu
to configure the functions of this unit when this unit is in the party
mode.
Main 11ch Stereo (Main zone 11-channel stereo)
Use this feature to select whether the sound field program of the
main zone is fixed to “11ch Stereo” when this unit is in the party
mode.
Target : Zone2/Target : Zone3/Target : Zone4
(Party mode target zone setting)
Use this feature to specify which zone joins to the party mode.
■ Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set/Zone4 Set
(Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 settings)
Zone2 Volume/Zone3 Volume/Zone4 Volume
(Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 volume)
Use this menu to select whether this unit controls the volume level
of the audio signals output at the ZONE OUT (ZONE2, ZONE3, or
ZONE4) jacks.
• When “Zone2 Volume”, “Zone3 Volume”, or “Zone4 Volume” is set to “Fixed”, you
cannot select the following parameters:
– Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol./Zone4 Max Vol.
– Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol./Zone4 Initial Vol.
– Zone2 Balance/Zone3 Balance/Zone4 Balance
• Even if you set “Zone2 Volume” to “Variable”, the volume control on this unit does
not function to the output level of the ZONE DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack (see
page 113).
Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol./Zone4 Max Vol.
(Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 Maximum volume setting)
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the Zone 2,
Zone 3, or Zone 4.
Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
The “Zone2 Max Vol.”, “Zone3 Max Vol.”, or “Zone4 Max Vol.” setting takes priority
over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.”, “Zone3 Initial Vol.”, or “Zone4 Initial Vol.” setting. For
example, “Zone2 Initial Vol.” is set to –20.0 dB and then “Zone2 Max Vol.” is set to
–30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power
of this unit next time.
Button Moving direction of the GUI display
9 k
Up
9 n
Down
9 h
Right
9 l
Left
Choice Functions
None
Does not display any background in your video monitor.
Piano
Displays a background image (the photograph of a piano)
in your monitor when there is no video signal being
input.
Horn
Displays a background image (the photograph of a horn)
in your monitor when there is no video signal being
input.
Electric Guitar
Displays a background image (the photograph of an
electric guitar) in your monitor when there is no video
signal being input.
Gray
Display a gray background in your monitor when there is
no video signal being input.
Note
Manual Setup (Multi Zone)
Choice Descriptions
Main
Select this setting when you use the speakers connected
to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals in the main room.
This unit outputs the same audio signals at the EXTRA
SP terminals as the FRONT A speaker terminals.
ZoneB
Select this setting when you use the speakers connected
to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals in another room.
When you turn off the FRONT A and FRONT B is turned
on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main
room are muted and this unit outputs sounds at the
FRONT B terminals only.
Notes
Choice Descriptions
Off
Select this setting to select the sound field program in the
main zone as you like.
On
Select this setting to fix the sound field program of the
main zone to “11ch Stereo” mode when this unit is in the
party mode.
Choice Descriptions
Disable
Select this setting not to join the selected zone to the
party mode. You can select the input source of the
selected zone independently even if this unit is in the
party mode.
Enable
Select this setting to join the selected zone to the party
mode. When this unit is in the party mode, the zone
which this unit plays back the same source as the main
zone in the zones join in the party mode.
Choice Descriptions
Fixed
Select this setting when you want to control the volume
level of the selected zone on the external amplifier. This
unit fixes the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume
level to a standard line level.
Variable
Select this setting when you want to control the volume
level of the selected zone on this unit. You can adjust the
ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume level
simultaneously with
C
VOLUME +/– on the remote
control.
Notes
Note
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
92 En
Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol./Zone4 Initial Vol.
(Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 initial volume setting)
Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4
when the power of each zone is turned on.
Control range: Off, Mute, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
The “Zone2 Max Vol.”, “Zone3 Max Vol.”, or “Zone4 Max Vol.” setting takes priority
over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.”, “Zone3 Initial Vol.”, “Zone4 Initial Vol.” setting.
Zone2 Balance/Zone3 Balance/Zone4 Balance
(Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 balance)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of the volume of the left and
right channels in each zone.
Choices: L10 to L1, 0, R1 to R10
Zone2 Mono/Zone3 Mono/Zone4 Mono
(Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 monaural mode)
Use this feature to select whether you play back sources monaurally
in the selected zone.
Muting Type
(Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 muting type)
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the
output volume of the selected zone.
■ Zone OSD (Zone on-screen display)
Use this feature to display the operational status of Zone 2, Zone 3,
and Zone 4 on the Zone 2 video monitor connected to the ZONE
VIDEO jacks on the rear panel of this unit. The Zone 2, Zone 3, and
Zone 4 information to be displayed is listed as follows:
• The input source
• The volume level
• The audio mute status
• The tonal quality status
• iPod or network/USB menu when “DOCK” or “NET/USB” is
selected as the input source of Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4
• You can connect up to two composite and one component video monitors to the
ZONE OUT VIDEO jacks and ZONE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. If you
connect multiple video monitors to the ZONE VIDEO and ZONE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, these video monitors display the same video images of
the input source of Zone 2.
• When you set “Zone OSD” to “Zone All”, the operational status of Zone 3 and Zone
4 appears on the Zone 2 video monitor(s) even if Zone 2 is turned off.
Use this menu to adjust the network and USB system parameters.
■ Configuration (Network configuration)
Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP address, etc.) or
to change them manually.
DHCP (DHCP setting)
Use this feature to select whether this unit can obtain the network
parameters (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, primary DNS
server and secondary DNS server) from the DHCP server of the
connected network.
IP Address (IP address)
Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to this unit.
This value must not duplicate the one used for other devices in the
target network.
Subnet Mask (Subnet mask)
Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value assigned to this
unit.
y
For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as “255.255.255.0”.
Default Gateway (Default gateway)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) (Primary DNS server)
DNS Server (S) (Secondary DNS server)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary and
secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers.
If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in “DNS Server (P)”. If you
have two or more DNS addresses, enter one of them in “DNS Server (P)” and another
in “DNS Server (S)”.
Setup (Setup)
Select “Setup” to confirm the settings of the “Configuration”
parameters.
Procedure of the network configuration
1 From the top GUI menu, press
9
k / n on the remote
control repeatedly and then
9
h to select
“Configuration”.
2 Press
9
k / n repeatedly and then
9
h to select
“DHCP”.
Note
Choice Descriptions
Off
Turns off the monaural playback mode. This unit plays
back sources in stereo.
On
Turns on the monaural playback mode. This unit mixes
down the left and right channel signals and plays the
sources monaurally.
Choice Functions
Full
Mutes all the audio output.
–20dB
Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.
–40dB
Reduces the current volume by 40 dB.
Choice Functions
Zone2
Displays the operational status of Zone 2 only.
Zone All
Displays the operational status of Zone 2, Zone 3, and
Zone 4.
Notes
Manual Setup (Network)
Choice Descriptions
On
Select this setting when this unit can obtain the network
parameters from the DHCP server of the connected
network.
Off
Select this setting when you set the network parameters
manually.
Note
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
93 En
Advanced
Operation
3 Press
9
k / n to select “On” or “Off” and then
9
ENTER to confirm.
• If you select “On”, you do not have to set other network parameters.
Refer to step 5 and finish the configuration.
• If you select “Off”, you need to set other network parameters. Refer
to steps 4 through 6 to set the parameters.
When “DHCP” is set to “On”, you cannot select and adjust any other network
settings. To specify the other parameters, you need to first set “DHCP” to “Off”.
4
Press
9
k
/
n to select the desired parameter and
then
9
h.
5 Press
9
l / h repeatedly to select the digit to
change and then press
9
k / n repeatedly to change
the number.
6 Press
9
ENTER to confirm the setting of the
parameter.
7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 to configure each network
parameter.
8 Press
9
n repeatedly to select “Setup” and then
9
ENTER to finish configuration.
In case you have changed your network configuration, you may need to reconfigure the
network settings again.
y
You can reset the network settings of this unit to the initial factory settings by using
“NETWORK” of “INITIALIZE” in the advanced setup menu (see page 120).
■ Information (Network information)
Use this feature to display the network system information.
The above display is an example.
MAC Address
(MAC (Media Access Control) address)
This information displays the MAC address that is assigned to this
unit.
Status (Network status)
This information displays the current link status of the network.
Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, No Link,
Full Duplex, Half Duplex
“No Link” appears when network connection is not made.
System (System ID)
This information displays the system ID that is assigned to this unit.
This menu adjusts the optional system settings.
■ Front Panel Disp.
(Front panel display setting)
Dimmer (Dimmer)
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Control range: – 4 to 0
Scroll (Front panel display message scroll)
Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as
song title or channel name) in the front panel display in a
continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after
scrolling all characters once when “DOCK”, or “NET/USB” is
selected as the input source.
■ iPod (iPod settings)
Standby Charge
(iPod charge on the standby mode)
Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the battery of the
stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode (see
page 64).
■ Audio Select
(Default audio input jack select)
Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack select
setting (see page 81) for the input sources connected to the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
Note
Note
Note
Note
Configuration
Information
MAC Address
00:00:00:00:00:00
Status
100BASE-TX
Full Duplex
System
ABCDE123
Manual Setup (Option)
Choice Functions
Continue
Continuous mode.
Select this to display the operation status in the front
panel display in a continuous manner.
Once
Scroll-once mode.
Select this to display the operation status in the front
panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters
after scrolling all characters once.
Choice Functions
Auto
Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is
turned on and in the standby mode.
Off
Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only when this
unit is turned on.
Choice Functions
Auto
Automatically detects the type of audio input signals and
selects the appropriate audio input jack select setting.
Last
Automatically selects the last audio input jack select
setting used for the connected input source.
0
Dimmer
Scroll
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
94 En
■ Decoder Mode (Default decoder mode)
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode (see page 82)
for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit.
■ EXTD Surround
(Default extended surround decoder mode
setting)
Use this feature to designate the extended surround decoder mode
(see page 72) for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
■ Memory Guard (Memory guard)
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound field
program parameter values and other system settings.
y
When you select the protected parameter, “ ” appears at the bottom left of the GUI
screen. You can adjust the parameters when you select the parameter and “ ” does not
appear at the bottom left of the GUI menu even if “Memory Guard” is set to “On”.
■ HDMI Set (HDMI settings)
Use this feature to adjust the HDMI support audio.
Support Audio (Support audio)
Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals
on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the
HDMI OUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.
Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the connected video
monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of each connected component.
Standby Through (Standby through)
Use this feature whether this unit allows the HDMI signals input at
the HDMI IN jacks to pass thorough this unit when this unit is in the
standby mode. You can also designate an HDMI IN jack and an
HDMI OUT jack that accept the signals when “Standby Through” is
set to “On” and this unit is in the standby mode.
• When “Standby Through” is set to “On” and this unit is in the standby mode, the
audio signals are only output at the HDMI OUT 1 or HDMI OUT 2.
• When “Standby Through” is set to “On”, the amount of power consumption in the
standby mode is increase. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time,
press
B
MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this
unit.
Input/output jack select
When “Standby Through” is set to “On”, you can designate an
HDMI IN jack and an HDMI OUT jack that accept the signals when
this unit in the standby mode.
Input (HDMI IN jack select)
Use this feature to select an HDMI IN jack select that accepts
HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode.
Output (HDMI OUT jack select)
Use this feature to select an HDMI OUT jack select that
outputs HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode.
■ Trigger Output (Trigger output)
Use this feature to select the functions of each TRIGGER OUT jack
on this unit.
Trigger operation mode
Choice Functions
Auto
Automatically detects the type of input signals and select
the appropriate decoder mode setting.
Last
Automatically selects the last decoder mode setting used
for the connected input source.
Choice Functions
Auto
Automatically detects the input digital audio signals and
activates the appropriate decoder.
Last
Selects the last selected extended surround decoder
mode.
Choice Functions
Off
Turns off the “Memory Guard” feature.
On
Protects the following parameters:
– sound field program parameters
– GUI menu parameters
– speaker levels settings
Choice Functions
DSP-Z11
Plays back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The HDMI
audio signals input at the HDMI input jacks on this unit
are not output to the HDMI component connected to the
HDMI OUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.
Other
Plays back HDMI audio signals on another HDMI
component connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
Note
Choice Functions
Off
Does not accept the HDMI signals when this unit is in the
standby mode.
On
Accepts the HDMI signals when this unit is in the
standby mode.
Notes
Choice Selected HDMI IN jack
IN1
HDMI IN1
IN2
HDMI IN2
IN3
HDMI IN3
IN4
HDMI IN4
FRONT
Front HDMI IN
Choice Selected HDMI OUT jack
OUT 1
HDMI OUT1
OUT 2
HDMI OUT2
Choice Function
Trigg er1
Sets the functions for the TRIGGER OUT 1 jack.
Trigger2
Sets the functions for the TRIGGER OUT 2 jack.
Choice Descriptions
Power
Select this setting to send the voltage signals at the
selected TRIGGER OUT jack while the selected zone is
turned on.
Source
Select this setting to send the voltage signals at the
selected TRIGGER OUT jack while the selected input
source is selected.
Manual
Select this setting to send the voltage signals manually.
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
95 En
Advanced
Operation
Source (Source)
After selecting the input source, you can set the function of the
TRIGGER OUT jacks when the corresponding input source is
selected.
Manual (Manual)
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate
and flag data of the current input signal.
■ Audio Info. (Audio information)
• “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding information.
• Some high definition audio bitstream contents may not include the discrete surround
back left and right channel signals but are encoded at the bitrate of 192 kHz.
• Even if you make settings to output bitstreams directly, some players convert the
Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams,
while converting the DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
bitstreams to the DTS bitstreams.
■ Video Info. (Video information)
HDMI error and message
Use this feature to select the language of the menu items and
messages.
Choices:
English (English), (Japanese),
Français (French), Deutsch (German),
Español (Spanish), Русский (Russian)
y
You can also select the language using the “LANGUAGE” parameter in “Advanced
setup” in the front panel display (see page 120).
··· The selected language is displayed.
— ··· The selected language is not displayed. The menu items and
messages are displayed in English.
Choice Descriptions
Input High
Sends the voltage when you select the input source
you set in “Source”.
Input Low
Stops sending the voltage when you select the input
source you set in “Source”.
Choice Function
High
Sends the voltage signals.
Low
Stops sending the voltage signals.
Signal Info.
(Input signal information)
Format
Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital
signal, it automatically switches to analog input.
Sampling
The number of samples per second taken from a
continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
Channel
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels
and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
Bitrate
The number of bits passing a given point per second.
Dialogue
The dialogue normalization level preset to the current
input bitstream signal (see page 131).
Flag1/Flag2
Flag data encoded in the bitstream, or PCM signals that
cue this unit to automatically switch decoders
(“Surround EX”, etc.).
Notes
HDMI Signal
Type of the source video signals and the
video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack
on this unit.
HDMI Resolution
Resolution of the input signal (analog or
HDMI) and the output signal (HDMI).
Analog Resolution
Resolution of the source video signals and
the analog video signals output at the
COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks of
this unit.
HDMI Error
(HDMI Message)
Error message for HDMI sources or
connected HDMI devices. See page 124 for
details.
Message Cause
Device Over
The number of the connected HDMI components is
over the limit.
HDCP authentication failed.
Out of Resolution
The connected monitor is not compatible with the
resolution of the input video signal.
Language
Language GUI menu
Front panel
display
Zone OSD
Русский
(Russian)
—
(Japanese)
——
Other languages
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
96 En
Use this feature to save and recall up to 10 of your favorite setting
for the main zone. You can also save up to four of your favorite
settings for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4.
■ Saving by the
7
SYSTEM MEMORY buttons
You can save the current system settings stored in “Memory1” to
“Memory4” by pressing the corresponding 7SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons.
Press and hold one of the
7
SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons on the remote control for 4 seconds.
“MEMORY 1 SAVE” (example) appears in the front panel display,
and then this unit saves the current system setting to the
corresponding memory number.
• If system settings are already saved in the selected memory number, this unit
overwrites the old system settings.
• To save the system settings for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4, press HZONE on the
remote control repeatedly to select the operation zone setting of the remote control
and then press and hold the desired 7 SYSTEM MEMORY button for 4 seconds.
You can save the system settings for the selected Zone only when the zone is turned
on.
• This unit saves the parameters in the groups you select by using the GUI menu when
you save the parameters by using the 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.
■ Saving by the GUI menu operation
You can save the current system settings stored in “Memory1” to
“Memory10” by using the “System Memory” menu in the GUI
menu.
1 Press
I
MENU on the remote control.
The top menu appears in the video monitor.
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “System Memory”
and then press 9h.
The “System Memory” menu appears in the video monitor.
3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired zone
and then press 9h.
In the following example, you select “Main” (main zone). The
list of the memory number appears in the video monitor.
4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Main Save” and
then press 9h.
The following menu appears in the video monitor.
5 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
memory number (“Memory1” to “Memory10” or
“Memory4”) and then press 9h.
The list of the saved items appears in the video monitor.
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
Saving the current system settings
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the
remote control to
F
AMP.
Notes
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
Stereo/Surround
Input Select
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Volume
Sound
Video
Main
Zone2
Zone3
Main Load
Main Save
Main Rename
Main Load
Main Save
Main Rename
Memory1
Memory2
Memory3
✓
✓
✓
✓
Memory1
Memory2
Memory3
Main Save
Input/HDMI Out
Audio
Volume
SP Config
Video
Option
Save
Group of the system parameters
✓
✓
✓
✓
Memory1
Memory2
Memory3
Main Save
Input/HDMI Out
Audio
Volume
SP Config
Video
Option
Save
Select: ENTER
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
97 En
Advanced
Operation
y
• If you select “Zone2”, “Zone3”, or “Zone4” in step 3, you can select
“Memory1” to “Memory4”. You can save the parameters for the selected zone
only when the zone is turned on.
• If system settings are already saved in the selected memory number, this unit
overwrite to old system settings.
• If you save the system settings to “Memory1” to “Memory4”, you can load the
stored settings by pressing the corresponding 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons
(see page 98).
6 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the group of
parameters and then press 9ENTER to select or
clear the check box of the group.
This unit saves the parameters in the checked groups. Refer to
“Saved parameters for the main zone” on page 98.
If the selected zone is other than “Main”, you can select “Input”, “Volume”, and
“Tone Control”. See page 98 for details.
7 Press 9n repeatedly to select “Save” and then
9ENTER to save the current system settings to the
selected memory number.
y
You can cancel the saving by pressing 9l.
8 Press
I
MENU again to exit from the GUI menu.
■ Renaming the stored settings
Use this feature to rename the stored settings. The name of each
memory number appears in the GUI menu or front panel display.
1 Press
I
MENU on the remote control.
The top menu appears in the video monitor.
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “System Memory”
and then press 9h.
The “System Memory” menu appears in the video monitor.
3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired zone
and then press 9h.
In the following example, “Main” is selected.
4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Main Rename”
(example) and then 9h.
The list of the memory number appears in the video monitor.
5 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
memory number and then 9h.
The rename display appears in the video monitor.
6 Press
9
ENTER repeatedly to select a character type
(CAPITAL/SMALL/LATIN CAPITAL/LATIN SMALL/
FIGURE/MARK).
7 Press
9
k / n to select the character you want to use
and
9
l / h to move to the next one.
• You can use up to 9 characters for each memory.
• Press
9
n to change the character in the following order, or
press
9
k to go in the reverse order:
CAPITAL A to Z, space
SMALL a to z, space
LATIN CAPITAL Ä, Ö, Ü, etc.
LATIN SMALL ä, ö, ü, etc.
FIGURE 0 to 9, space
MARK !, #, %, &, etc.
• Press
9
ENTER to switch between character types.
y
Press 9h repeatedly to select “RESET” and then press 9ENTER to set the
name of the memory to the initial name.
• The character types you can select differ depending on the setting in
“Language” (see page 95).
• If you set “Language” to “ ”, you can also select Japanese characters.
8 Press
9
h repeatedly to select “OK” and press
9
ENTER when complete.
y
Repeat steps 5 to 7 to rename each input.
9 Press
I
MENU again to exit from the GUI menu.
If you change the setting of “Language” (see page 95) or “LANGUAGE” (see
page 120), the name of each system memory are automatically set to the initial name of
the selected language.
Note
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Memory1
Memory2
Memory3
Main Save
Input/HDMI Out
Audio
Volume
SP Config
Video
Option
Save
Current selected group of the parameters
appears in red
Select: ENTER
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Memory1
Memory2
Memory3
Main Save
Input/HDMI Out
Audio
Volume
SP Config
Video
Option
Save
Save: ENTER
Notes
Note
Memory1
Memory2
Memory3
CAPITAL
Memory1
OK RESET
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
98 En
■ Saved parameters for the main zone
The groups of the system parameters indicated in bold are the
groups that is saved in the initial setting.
* The playing status of the network/USB sources (selected radio station, etc.) is also
saved.
■ Saved parameters for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4
* The playing status of the network/USB sources (selected radio station,
etc.) is also saved.
■ Loading by the 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons
You can recall the system settings stored in “Memory1” to
“Memory4” by pressing the corresponding 7SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons.
y
To recall the system settings for Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4, press HZONE on the
remote control repeatedly to select the operation zone setting of the remote control in
advance. You can recall the system settings for the selected zone only when the zone is
turned on.
1 Press one of the 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons on
the remote control to select the desired memory
number.
“MEMORY 1 LOAD” (example) appears in the front panel
display.
y
“EMPTY” appears in the menu screen if no system settings are stored in the
selected memory number.
2 Press the selected 7SYSTEM MEMORY button
once more to confirm the selection.
This unit loads the settings stored in the selected memory
number.
■ Loading by the GUI menu operation
1 Press
I
MENU on the remote control.
The top menu appears in the video monitor.
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “System Memory”
and then press 9h.
The “System Memory” menu appears in the video monitor.
3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired zone
and then press 9h.
In the following example, you select “Main” (main zone). The
list of the memory number appears in the video monitor.
Group Parameters Page
Input/HDMI
Out
*
Audio Select
82
Decoder Mode
82
Input source 50
HDMI OUT SEL
—
Audio Stereo/Surround
77
Pure Direct on/off 61
EXTD SUR. setting 72
Adaptive DRC
86
Adaptive DSP Lvl
86
LFE Level
86
Dynamic Range
87
Tone Control
88
Pure Direct
89
CINEMA DSP HD³ ON/OFF 60
Volume Volume level
50
SP Config S-Wave Control
87
Parametric EQ
87
THX Set
83
Speaker Set
84
Speaker Distance
85
Speaker Level
86
Speaker B
91
Information (Auto Setup)
45
Setup Menu (Auto Setup)
44
Selected front speaker set (A and/or B)
51
Video Conversion
89
HDMI Processing
90
Component I/P
90
HDMI Resolution
90
HDMI Aspect
90
Short Message
90
On Screen
90
Position
90
Wall Paper
91
Option Lipsync
88
Front Panel Disp.
93
Support Audio
94
Note
Parameter Descriptions Page
Input
Input source *
117
Vo l u m e
Volume level
117
Tone Control
Tone control settings
117
Note
Loading the stored system settings
• Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on
the remote control to
F
AMP.
• This unit overwrites the stored settings to the current settings of this unit. If you
do not want to erase the current settings, save the current settings to any System
Memory number in advance.
Main Load
Main Save
Main Rename
Memory1
Memory2
Memory3
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
99 En
Advanced
Operation
You can recall the system settings for the selected zone only when the zone is
turned on.
4 Press 9k / n to select “Main Load” and then press
9h.
The following menu appears in the video monitor.
y
If system settings are already stored in the selected memory number, the stored
system parameter settings appear in the menu screen. “Memory Empty” appears
in the menu screen if no system settings are stored in the selected memory
number.
5 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
memory number where the system settings are
stored and then press 9h.
Once “Load: ENTER” appears in the video monitor, press
9ENTER to confirm the loading.
y
You can cancel the loading by pressing 9l.
6 Press
I
MENU to exit from the GUI menu.
■ Example 1: Switching the settings of this unit
according to the using situations
Use the following example to change the settings of this unit
according to the using situations just by pressing the 7SYSTEM
MEMORY buttons.
SYSTEM MEMORY 1: Settings for enjoying movie
Save the following settings to enjoy movies. You can switch the
input source, sound field program, and the HDMI OUT jack
simultaneously.
Recommended parameter settings
Input source: BD/HD DVD (see page 50)
“HDMI OUT SEL” setting: OUT 2 (see page 51)
Sound field program: Sci-Fi (see page 54)
“Dimmer”: –4 (see page 93)
Saved parameter groups
Input/HDMI Out, Audio, Option
SYSTEM MEMORY 2: Settings for enjoying TV programs
When you want to play back the audio signals input at the CBL/
SAT HDMI IN 3 jack on the speakers of the TV connected to the
HDMI OUT 1 jack to enjoy TV programs, use the following
settings. You can set input source and output component of the
audio signals simultaneously.
Recommended parameter settings
Input source: CBL/SAT (see page 50)
“HDMI OUT SEL” setting: OUT 1 (see page 51)
“Support Audio” setting: Other (see page 94)
Saved parameter groups
Input/HDMI Out, Audio
SYSTEM MEMORY 3: Settings for the book-reading time
When you enjoy reading books with listening to your favorite
Internet radio service, use the following settings. You can recall the
desired input source, Internet radio service, and audio settings
simultaneously.
Recommended parameter settings
Input source: NET/USB (Net Radio) (see page 50)
Sound field program: 11ch Enhancer (see page 54)
Volume level: Slightly low (see page 50)
y
Before saving the settings, select the desired Internet radio service (see page 69).
Saved parameter groups
Input/HDMI Out, Audio, Volume
Note
Memory1
Memory2
Memory3
Main Save
Input/HDMI Out
Audio
Volume
SP Config
Video
Option
Memory1
Memory2
Memory3
Main Save
Input/HDMI Out
Audio
Volume
SP Config
Video
Option
Save
Load: ENTER
Using examples
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
SYSTEM MEMORY 2
Settings for enjoying TV programs
SYSTEM MEMORY 4
Settings for enjoying games
SYSTEM MEMORY 3
Settings for the book-reading time
SYSTEM MEMORY 1
Settings for enjoying movie
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
100 En
SYSTEM MEMORY 4: Settings for enjoying games
Save the following settings to enjoy roleplaying games. You can
switch the input source, sound field program, and the HDMI OUT
jack simultaneously.
Recommended parameter settings
Input source: V-AUX (see page 50)
Sound field program: Roleplaying Game (see page 54)
“HDMI OUT SEL” setting: OUT 2 (see page 51)
Saved parameter groups
Input/HDMI Out, Audio
■ Example 2: Switching the setting of this unit
according to the environment of the listening
room
Use the following example to change the speaker and audio settings
according to the environment of the listening room and the
situation.
SYSTEM MEMORY 1: Settings for a single listening
position
Save the result of the automatic setup for a single listening position.
Recommended parameter settings
Automatic setup: The result when you perform the
measurement for the single listening position (see page 42).
Saved parameter group
SP Config
SYSTEM MEMORY 2: Settings for multiple listening
positions
Save the result of the automatic setup for the multiple listening
positions.
Recommended parameter settings
Automatic setup: The result when you perform the
measurement for the multiple listening positions (see page 42).
Saved parameter group
SP Config
SYSTEM MEMORY 3: Settings for the midnight listening
The acoustic characteristics may change whether curtains are
opened or closed. Use the following settings for the listening when
you want to enjoy movies in midnight with low volume level.
Recommended parameter settings
Automatic setup: The result when you perform the
measurement with the curtains are closed (see page 42).
“Adaptive DRC” setting: Auto (see page 86)
“Adaptive DSP Lvl” setting: Auto (see page 86)
Saved parameter groups
Audio, SP Config
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
SYSTEM MEMORY 2
Settings for multiple
listening positions
SYSTEM MEMORY 1
Settings for a single
listening position
SYSTEM MEMORY 3
Settings for the midnight
listening
Controlling this unit by using the Web browser (Web Control Center)
101 En
Advanced
Operation
You can operate this unit by using a Web browser. You can select the input source and sound field program, browse the iPod or network/USB
contents, select the preset items, and adjust the parameters of this unit by using the graphical user interface (Web Control Center) that appears
in the Web browser. Check the IP address of this unit by using “IP Address” in “Network” menu (see page 92) in advance, and then enter the
IP address to the Web browser to access this unit to control it.
y
• To use this feature, this unit and your PC must be connected properly in the network. See page 37 for details of the connections.
• We recommend that you use Windows Internet Explorer 6 or 7 that is installed on Windows XP or Windows Vista PC to access this unit.
• You can select whether this unit accepts the controls by using the Web browser when this unit is in the standby mode. See page 119 for details.
• You can register the MAC address of the PCs you want to use to control this unit and limit the PCs that can control this unit by using the Web browser. You can select that this unit
allows the access to this unit by the PCs whose MAC addresses are registered to this unit or allows the access by any PCs by using “MAC FILTER” in “Advanced setup” (see
page 120).
Controlling this unit by using the Web browser (Web Control Center)
Controlling Network/
USB features
PC
This unit
Power on/offSelecting the input source
Web browser
Control
Adjusting the
system parameters
And many other features...
Remote control features
102 En
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha and other
manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see
page 104).
■ Controlling this unit
Set the operation mode selector to
F
AMP to control this unit.
*1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the operation mode
selector position.
*2 These buttons control this unit only when the component operation mode
selector is set to FAMP.
■ Controlling a TV
Set the operation mode selector to
F
TV to control your TV. To
control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code
to the TV control area in advance (see page 104).
*1 2TV POWER can always turn on or off the power of the TV regardless
of the operation mode selector position.
*2 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is
set to FTV. For details, see the “TV” column on page 103.
*3 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is
set to FTV or FSOURCE.
y
If no code has been set to the “TV” area, the remote control operates the component
that is set to the “DTV” area (see page 104).
Remote control features
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
Notes
AMP
TV
SOURCE
ZONEMODE
SELECT
SETUP ID
MACRO
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
VOLUME
DVD CD
V-A UXMULTI
AVTV
PHONO
CD-R
POWER
STANDBY
POWERPOWER
DTV DVR VCR
DOCK
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
TAP E
CBL
SAT
NET
USB
REC
SRCH MODELEVEL
BAND
MENUTITLE
CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL 2 LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
MEMORY
PC/MCX
RETURN DISPLAY
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
MUTE
2
1
NET RADIO
USB
MOVIE STEREO SUR. DECODE
EXTD SUR.
ENHANCER
THX STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
PARTY SLEEP HDMI OUT AUDIO SEL
TV VOL TV CH TV
3D DSP
1234
5678
ENT
MUTE AUDIO
INPUT
90
10
Set to AMP
*1
*1
*2
*2
Notes
Remote control Functions
TV VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
TV CH +/–
Changes the currently selected channel.
TV MUTE
Mutes the audio output.
TV INPUT
Switches the input source.
AMP
TV
SOURCE
ZONEMODE
SELECT
SETUP ID
MACRO
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
VOLUME
DVD CD
V-A UXMULTI
AVTV
PHONO
CD-R
POWER
STANDBY
POWERPOWER
DTV DVR VCR
DOCK
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
TAP E
CBL
SAT
NET
USB
REC
SRCH MODELEVEL
BAND
MENUTITLE
CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL 2 LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
MEMORY
PC/MCX
RETURN DISPLAY
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
MUTE
2
1
NET RADIO
USB
MOVIE STEREO SUR. DECODE
EXTD SUR.
ENHANCER
THX STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
PARTY SLEEP HDMI OUT AUDIO SEL
TV VOL TV CH TV
3D DSP
1234
5678
ENT
MUTE AUDIO
INPUT
90
10
Set to TV
*1
*2
*2
*3
Remote control features
103 En
Advanced
Operation
■ Controlling other components
Set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE to control other
components selected with the input selector buttons or (3). You
must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source
in advance (see page 104). The following table shows the function
of each control button used to control other components assigned to
each input selector button or (3). Be advised that some buttons
may not correctly operate the selected component.
y
The remote control has 16 modes (control areas) to control components so that the
remote control can operate up to 16 different components.
*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2 These buttons operate your video recorder (DVD recorder etc.) only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 104).
■ Selecting a component to be controlled
You can select a component to be controlled independently of the
input source selected with the input selector buttons or .
Press
5
SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the desired
component.
The name of the component to be controlled appears in the display
window (4) on the remote control.
■ Controlling optional components (Option
mode)
“OPTN1” and “OPTN2” are optional component control areas that
can be programmed with remote control functions independently
from any input source. This areas are useful for programming
commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or
for components that do not have a valid remote control code.
To select the option mode, press
5
SELECT l / h
repeatedly until “OPTN1” or “OPTN2” appears in the
display window (4) on the remote control.
You cannot set a remote control code for the optional component control areas. See
page 105 to program buttons operated within these component control areas.
AMP
TV
SOURCE
ZONEMODE
SELECT
SETUP ID
MACRO
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
VOLUME
DVD CD
V-A UXMULTI
AVTV
PHONO
CD-R
POWER
STANDBY
POWERPOWER
DTV DVR VCR
DOCK
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
TAP E
CBL
SAT
NET
USB
SRCH MODELEVEL
PRESET/CH
2
1
VOLUME
REC
SRCH MODELEVEL
BAND
MENUTITLE
CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL 2 LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
MEMORY
PC/MCX
RETURN DISPLAY
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
MUTE
NET RADIO
USB
MOVIE STEREO SUR. DECODE
EXTD SUR.
ENHANCER
THX STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
PARTY SLEEP HDMI OUT AUDIO SEL
TV VOL TV CH TV
3D DSP
1234
5678
ENT
MUTE AUDIO
INPUT
90
10
[
1
]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Set to SOURCE
Blu-ray Disc/
HD DVD player/
recorder
DVD player LD player
DVD recorder/
Digital video
recorder
VCR TV
Cable TV/
Satellite tuner
CD player
MD recorder/
CD recorder
Tape deck Tuner
[1] AV P OWE R
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
DVR power
*2
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
[2] TITLE,
BAND
Title Title Title Title Band
[3] PRESET/CH
k
Menu up Menu up Menu up Channel up Menu up Channel up Menu up
PRESET/CH
n
Menu down Menu down Menu down Channel down Menu down Channel down Menu down
A-E l Menu left Menu left Menu left Menu left Menu left
A-E h Menu right Menu right Menu right Menu right
Direction
A/B
Menu right
ENTER Menu enter Menu enter Menu enter Menu enter Menu enter
[4] RETURN,
MEMORY
Return Return Return Return Memory
[5] REC Record
(recorder)
Disc skip Record Record
DVR record
*2
DVR record
*2
Disc skip Record Record
e Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause
DVR pause
*2
DVR pause
*2
Pause Pause Pause
p Play Play Play Play Play
DVR play
*2
DVR play
*2
Play Play Play
s Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop
DVR stop
*2
DVR stop
*2
Stop Stop Stop
ll
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
DVR search
backward
*2
DVR search
backward
*2
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
hh Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward
Search
forward
DVR search
forward
*2
DVR search
forward
*2
Search forward Search forward
Search
forward
b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward
Skip
backward
DVR skip
backward
*2
DVR skip
backward
*2
Skip backward Skip backward Direction A
a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward
DVR skip
forward
*2
DVR skip
forward
*2
Skip forward Skip forward Direction B
[6] 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons
Numeric
buttons
[7] MENU,
SRCH MODE
Menu Menu Menu Menu Search mode
[8] DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display
[9] ENT Index Index Chapter/time Index Enter Enter Enter Index Index Enter
[10] AUDIO Audio Audio Audio Audio
Notes
DVD
Note
Remote control features
104 En
Use the setup mode of the remote control to customize the remote
control.
1 Press GSETUP on the remote control using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window on the remote control.
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired setup
mode.
3 After the configurations, press GSETUP again to
exit from the setup menu.
If you do not complete each of the operations within 30 seconds, this unit
automatically exits from the setup menu.
You can set the backlight mode of the remote control.
1 Press GSETUP on the remote control using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4) on the remote
control.
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “LIGHT” and then
press 9ENTER.
“LIGHT” and the current “LIGHT” setting appears in the
display window (4) alternately.
3 Press 9k / n to select the desired setting.
4 Press 9ENTER to confirm the setting.
“OK” appears in the display window (4).
5 Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup mode.
y
You can light up the backlight by pressing 6LIGHT anytime.
You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote
control codes. Codes can be set up for each control area. For a
complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of
remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
The following table shows the default component (Library:
component category) and the remote control code for each control
area.
Remote control code default settings
You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a Yamaha remote
control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote
control code.
Customizing the remote control
Setup mode Descriptions
Page
SETUP
Top setup mode menu.
–
LEARN
Learning mode. Use this feature to program codes
from other remote controls.
105
P-SET
Preset mode. Use this feature to change the remote
control code of each control area.
104
RNAME
Renaming mode. Use this feature to change the
name of each control area.
106
MACRO
Macro programming mode. Use this feature to set
the macro program.
108
CLEAR
Clearing mode. Use this feature to clear the
configurations of this unit.
109
ERASE
Erase mode. Use this feature to erase the learned
functions of each button.
109
EX-IR
Extended IR code mode. This feature is for the
authorized custom installers only.
—
LIGHT
Backlight mode. Use this feature to set the light up
mode of the remote control.
104
Note
Setting the backlight mode of the remote
control (LIGHT)
LIGHT
ON
Current “LIGHT” setting
Choice Descriptions
ON
Lights up the backlight when a button is pressed
or the remote control detects a motion.
OFF
Lights up the backlight only when 6LIGHT is
pressed.
Setting remote control codes (P-SET)
Control area
Library
(component
category)
Manufacturer
Default
code
MULTI DVD Yamaha 04306
V-AU X — — —
PHONO — — —
MD TAPE MD Yamaha 00409
BD
HD DVD
DVD Yamaha 04306
DVD DVD Yamaha 04306
CD CD Yamaha 01105
CD-R CD-R Yamaha 01405
CBL
SAT
———
DTV — — —
DVR DVR Yamaha 00707
VCR — — —
TUNER SOURCE Yamaha 00012
DOCK SOURCE Yamaha 00012
NET
USB
SOURCE Yamaha 00012
(TAPE)
TAPE Yamaha 00311
TV — — —
Note
Remote control features
105 En
Advanced
Operation
1 Press GSETUP on the remote control using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
The remote control enters the setup menu. “SETUP” appears in
the display window (4) on the remote control.
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “P-SET” and then
press 9ENTER.
The remote control enters the preset mode. “P-SET” and name
of the currently selected control area appears in the display
window (4) alternately.
3 Set the operation mode selector to GSOURCE and
then press an input selector button or (3) or
5SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the control
area you want to customize.
“P-SET” and name of the selected control area appears in the
display window (4) alternately.
y
If you want to select “TV”, set the operation mode selector to FTV.
4 Press 9ENTER.
The five-digit code set for the selected control area appears in
the display window (4).
“00000” appears in the display window (4) if no code has been set.
5 Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the
five-digit remote control code for the component you
want to use.
For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to
“List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
y
You can also enter the desired number by pressing 9 k / n / l / h repeatedly.
6 Press 9ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window (4) if setting was
successful.
“NG” appears in the display window (4) if the setting was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.
y
If you continuously want to set up another code for another control area, repeat
steps 3 through 6.
7 Press
G
SETUP again to exit from the setup mode.
8 Press
A
p or 2AV POWER to confirm whether you
can control your component using the remote
control.
y
If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your component has more than one
code, try each of them until you find the correct one.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control if you press a
button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button
simultaneously.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially
available audio and video components (including Yamaha components). If operation
is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control
function using the learning feature (see “Programming codes from other remote
controls (LEARN)” on page 105) or use the remote control supplied with the
component.
• Functions programmed using the learning mode take priority over remote control
code functions.
• If you set “00012” as the remote control code of the selected control area, you can
operate the currently selected internal source (DOCK, or NET/USB).
You can program remote control codes from other remote controls.
Use the learning feature if you want to program functions not
included in the basic operations covered by the remote control
codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You
can program the function of other remote control to the buttons in
the highlighted areas in the following illustration. The buttons can
be programmed independently for each control area.
• The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses
infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may
not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to
the operating instructions for the other remote control.
• You cannot program the desired remote control code even if you select the buttons in
the highlighted area in the above illustration depending on the selected control area
and the assigned library.
1 Set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and
then press an input selector button or (3) to select
the desired control area.
The name of the control area you want to customize appears in
the display window (4) on the remote control.
y
• You can also select the desired control area by pressing 5SELECT l / h
repeatedly.
• If you want to select “TV”, set the operation mode selector to FTV.
Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to
F
SOURCE or FTV. When
you set the operation mode selector to FAMP and program a remote control
codes from other remote controls, the programmed key cannot operate the
amplifier function of this unit.
2 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).
Note
P-SET DVD
04306
Notes
Programming codes from other remote
controls (LEARN)
Notes
Note
AMP
TV
SOURCE
SELECT
SETUP ID
MACRO
DVD CD
V-A UXMULTI
AVTV
PHONO
CD-R
POWER
STANDBY
POWERPOWER
DTV DVR VCR
DOCK
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
TAP E
CBL
SAT
NET
USB
4
3
SYSTEM
MEMORY
VOLUME
REC
SRCH MODELEVEL
BAND
MENUTITLE
CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL 2 LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
MEMORY
PC/MCX
RETURN DISPLAY
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
MUTE
2
1
NET RADIO
USB
MOVIE STEREO SUR. DECODE
EXTD SUR.
ENHANCER
THX STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
PARTY SLEEP HDMI OUT AUDIO SEL
TV VOL TV CH TV
3D DSP
1234
5678
ENT
MUTE AUDIO
INPUT
90
10
Set to
SOURCE
Remote control features
106 En
3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “LEARN” and then
press 9ENTER.
The remote control enters the learning mode. “LEARN” and
the name of the selected control area appears in the display
window (4) alternately.
4 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
apart from the other remote control on a flat surface
so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each
other and then press 9ENTER.
“L–KEY” appears in the display window (4).
5 Press the button for which you want to program the
new function.
“START” appears in the display window (4).
6 Press and hold the button you want to program on
the other remote control until “OK” appears in the
display window (4).
“NG” appears in the display window (4) if learning was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.
y
• When you want to program another function, repeat steps 4 and 6.
• When you continuously want to program another function for another control
area, set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and then press
5SELECT l / h repeatedly and then repeat steps 4 through 6. If you want
to select “TV” as the control area, set the operation mode selector to FTV and
then repeat steps 4 through 6.
7 Press
G
SETUP again to exit the setup menu.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control if you press a
button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button
simultaneously.
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on
the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 200
functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for
further learning.
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak.
– when the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small.
– when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the
appropriate angle.
– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
– when the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon.
You can change the name of the control area (input source) that
appears in the display window (4) on the remote control if you
want to use a different name than the factory preset. This feature is
useful when you have set an control area to control a different
component.
1 Set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and
then press an input selector button or (3) to
select the desired control area.
The name of the control area you want to customize appears in
the display window (4) on the remote control.
2 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window.
3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “RNAME” and then
press 9ENTER.
The remote control enters the renaming mode. “RNAME” and
the name of the selected control area appears in the display
window alternately.
y
You can change the renamed control area by pressing an input selector button or
(3) or 5SELECT l / h repeatedly.
4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select 3-letter name or 5-
letter name you want to edit.
Each control area has both 3-letter name and 5-letter name.
You can rename the 3-letter name and 5-letter name
independently.
START DVD
AMP
TV
SOURCE
ZONEMODE
SELECT
SETUP ID
MACRO
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
VOLUME
DVD C D
V-A UXMULTI
AVTV
PHONO
CD-R
POWER
STANDBY
POWERPOWER
DTV DVR VCR
DOCK
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
TAP E
CBL
SAT
NET
USB
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
BAND
MENU
TITLE
MEMORY
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
MUTE
2
1
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
Other remote control
AMP
TV
SOURCE
ZONEMODE
SELECT
SETUP ID
MACRO
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
VOLUME
DVD C D
V-A UXMULTI
AVTV
PHONO
CD-R
POWER
STANDBY
POWERPOWER
DTV DVR VCR
DOCK
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
TAP E
CBL
SAT
NET
USB
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
BAND
MENU
TITLE
MEMORY
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
2
1
AMP
TV
SOURCE
ZONEMODE
SELECT
SETUP ID
MACRO
SYSTEM MEMORY
DVD C D
V-A UXMULTI
AVTV
PHONO
CD-R
POWER
STANDBY
POWERPOWER
DTV DVR VCR
DOCK
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
TAP E
CBL
SAT
NET
USB
Other remote control
Notes
Changing source names in the display
window (RNAME)
BD/HD
RNAME BD/HD
BD BD/HD
3-letter name 5-letter name
Remote control features
107 En
Advanced
Operation
5 Press 9ENTER.
The edit screen of the name of the currently selected control
area appears in the display window (4).
6 Press 9l / h repeatedly to move the cursor (_) to
the position you want to edit.
7 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select and enter the
desired character.
Pressing 9k changes the character as follows:
A to Z, a to z, 0, 1 to 9, space, - (minus), + (plus), / (slash) and
: (colon).
y
Pressing 9n changes the characters in reverse order.
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you change all the letters
you want.
9 Press 9ENTER to set the new name.
“OK” appears in the display window (4) on the remote
control if renaming was successful.
y
When you want to rename the another name of the selected control area, press the
input selector button
(3) or 5SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the
desired control area and then press 9ENTER and then carry out the operations
of steps 4 through 9.
10 Press
G
SETUP again to exit the setup menu.
The new name of the control area appears in the display
window (4).
“ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control if you press a
button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button
simultaneously.
The macro programming feature makes it possible to perform a
series of operations with the press of a single button. For example,
when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the
components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start
playback. The macro programming feature lets you perform all of
these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The
buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro
programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 108).
■ Recalling programmed macro-operations
1 Press HMACRO on the remote control.
2 Press the desired macro button.
“M:the 3-letter name of the selected control area” (for
example, “M:DVD”) appears in the display window (4), and
this unit transmits the programmed functions. When you press
DSTANDBY or EPOWER, “M:STB” or “M:PWR” appears
in the display window (4), and this unit transmits the
programmed functions.
3 Press HMACRO again to exit from the macro-
operation mode.
• While the remote control is running a macro program, it does not accept any other
operation until it has completed running the program (the transmission indicator in
the display stops flashing).
• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the
macro operation is complete.
• If you do not complete each of the operations within 30 seconds, this unit
automatically exits from the macro-operation mode.
Note
BD/HD
HDDVD
Macro programming features
Notes
AMP
TV
SOURCE
ZONEMODE
SELECT
SETUP ID
MACRO
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
DVD CD
V-A UXMULTI
AVTV
PHONO
CD-R
POWER
STANDBY
POWERPOWER
DTV DVR VCR
DOCK
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
TAP E
CBL
SAT
NET
USB
2
1
MACRO
Macro buttons
MACRO
Remote control features
108 En
■ Default macro functions
*1 Set the appropriate remote control code for TV in advance (see
page 104).
*2 This unit plays the last received station or selected contents before the
unit was set in the standby mode.
■ Programming macro operations (MACRO)
You can program your own macro and use the macro programming
feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at
the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or
perform learning operations before programming the macro.
• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The
default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared.
• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming
a macro changes all macro contents.
• We do not recommend that you program continuous operations (for example, volume
control) in a macro.
1 Press GSETUP on the remote control using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “MACRO” and then
press 9ENTER.
The remote control enters the macro-programming mode.
“MACRO” and “M:the three-letter name of the selected control
area” (for example, “M:DVD”) appears in the display window
(4) alternately.
3 Press the desired macro button you want to assign
the macro program to and then press 9ENTER.
“M:the three-letter name of the selected macro button” (for
example, “M:DVD”) and the name of the currently selected
control area appears in the display window (4) alternately.
When you press DSTANDBY or EPOWER, “M:STB” or
“M:PWR” and the name of the currently selected control area
appears in the display window (4) alternately.
4 Press the buttons for the functions you want to
include in the macro operation in sequence.
Example
Set the input source to DVD
→ Turn on the DVD player →
Turn on the video monitor
Step 1 (“MCR1”): Press DVD.
Step 2 (“MCR2”): Press AV POWER.
Step 3 (“MCR3”): Press TV POWER.
• To change the selected input area, press
5
SELECT l / h. Pressing the
input selector buttons or will program a macro step, whereas
5
SELECT l / h only changes the selected input area.
• The position of the operation mode selector (AMP/TV/SOURCE) affects the
assigned function. When the operation mode selector is set to FAMP or
FTV, the input source selectors do not function.
5 Press HMACRO to confirm the program.
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10
steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically
exits from the macro programming mode.
Pressing
macro
To automatically transmit these signals
First Second
—
Notes
STANDBY STANDBY
POWER
POWER
POWER
TV
(*1)
MULTI MULTI
V-AUX V- AUX
PHONO PHONO
MD
TAPE
MD
TAPE
BD
HD DVD
BD
HD DVD
DVD DVD
CD CD
CD-R CD-R
CBL
SAT
CBL
SAT
DTV DTV
DVR DVR
VCR VCR
TUNER TUNER
DOCK DOCK
NET
USB
NET
USB
(*2)
Notes
MACRO M:DVD
DVD CD
V-AUXMULTI
AVTV
PHONO
CD-R
POWER
STANDBY
POWERPOWER
DTV DVR VCR
DOCK
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
TAPE
CBL
SAT
NET
USB
1
23
Indicates the number of macro
steps entered
Flashes alternately so you can set the
next step
(Selected macro button)
(Selected control area)
MCR 1
M:DVD
DVD
Remote control features
109 En
Advanced
Operation
6 Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup mode.
“ERROR” appears in the display window (B) if you press more than one button
simultaneously.
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned
functions, macros, renamed control area names and setup remote
control ID.
■ Clearing function sets (CLEAR)
1 Press GSETUP on the remote control using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “CLEAR” and then
press 9ENTER.
The remote control enters the clear mode. “CLEAR” and
“L:the three-letter name of the selected control area” (for
example, “L:DVD”) appears in the display window (4)
alternately.
3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired clear
mode.
4 Press and hold 9ENTER for about 3 seconds.
When the clearing is successful, “OK” appears in the display
window (4).
• “NG” appears in the display window (4) if clearing was unsuccessful.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press a button not indicated in
the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously.
5 Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup mode.
■ Clearing a learned function (ERASE)
1 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “ERASE” and then
press 9ENTER.
The remote control enters the learning mode. “ERASE” and
the name of the currently selected control area appears in the
display window (4) alternately.
3 Set the operation mode selector to
F
SOURCE and
then press an input selector button or (3).
“ERASE” and the name of the selected control area appears in
the display window (4) alternately.
y
• You can also select the desired control area by pressing 5SELECT l / h
repeatedly.
• If you want to erase the function learned in the AMP or TV control area, set the
operation mode selector to FAMP or FTV.
4 Press 9ENTER.
“E-KEY” appears in the display window (4).
5 Press and hold the button you want to clear for about
3 seconds.
If clearing is successful, “ERASE” and “OK” appears in the
display window (4).
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 3.
• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to
the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes).
6 Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup mode.
• “NG” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control if clearing was
unsuccessful.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press more than one button
simultaneously.
Note
Clearing configurations
Clear mode Descriptions
L:DVD (etc.)
(L:Three-digit name of the selected control area) Clears all
learned functions the respective control area. You can
change the control area to be cleared by pressing the desired
input selector button or (3) or 5SELECT l / h
repeatedly.
L:AMP
Sets all learned functions for controlling the amplifier
functions to the initial factory settings. Set the operation
mode selector to FAMP to select this clear mode.
L:TV
Clears all learned functions for TV control area. Set the
operation mode selector to FTV to select this clear mode.
L:ALL
Clears all learned functions.
M:DVD (etc.)
(M:Name of the selected macro button) Clears the macro
programmed for the selected macro button (see page 108).
The assigned macro to the selected macro button reverts to
the initial factory macro. Press the desired macro button if
you want to change the macro button you want to clear the
programmed functions of.
M:ALL
Clears all programmed macros. The assigned macro to the
selected macro button reverts to the initial factory macro.
RNAME
Set all the name of the control areas to the default settings.
FCTRY
Set all settings of the remote control to the initial factory
settings.
CLEAR L:DVD
Notes
Notes
ERASE DVD
ERASE OK
Remote control features
110 En
Use the supplied simplified remote control to make basic controls of this unit.
When you select “NET/USB” as the input source, this unit activates the last selected sub input source (see page 67).
■ Setting the controlling zone of the simplified
remote control
Use this feature to set the controlling zone (see page 116) and
remote control ID (see page 119) of the simplified remote control.
Setting the remote control ID
Press and hold b on the simplified remote control and then 1 or
2 for 3 seconds to select the desired remote control ID.
• ID1: Press and hold b and 1.
• ID2: Press and hold b and 2.
Setting the controlling zone
Press and hold a on the simplified remote control and then 1, 2,
3, or 4 to select the desired zone.
• Main zone: Press and hold a and then press 1.
• Zone 2: Press and hold a and 2.
• Zone 3: Press and hold a and 3.
• Zone 4: Press and hold a and 4.
■ Replacing the battery in the simplified remote
control
Change the battery when the operation range of the simplified
remote control decreases.
• Insert the battery according to the polarity markings (+ and –).
• If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the simplified
remote control to prevent an explosion or acid leak.
• If a battery starts leaking, dispose of it immediately. Be careful not to let
the leaking battery acid touch your skin or clothing.
• Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean.
• Dispose of batteries according to your regional regulations.
Simplified remote control
Note
POWER
STANDBY
INPUT
SYSTEM MEMORY
4132
INT SOURCE VOLUME
MUTE
PRESET
STANDBY
Sets the selected zone to the
standby mode.
☞ P. 39
SYSTEM MEMORY
Save or recall the system settings.
☞ P. 96
INPUTl / h
Select the input source.
☞ P. 50
PRESET +/–
Recall the preset network/USB
contents.
☞ P. 70
s(stop) / p(play) /
b(skip backward) /
a(skip forward)
Control playback of the iPod or
Network/USB contents.
☞ P. 64, 67
POWER
Turn on the power.
☞ P. 39
VOLUME +/–
Adjust the volume level.
☞ P. 50
MUTE
Mutes the audio output.
☞ P. 52
Remove the insulation sheet before using the remote
control.
Notes
Use a straight
pin to remove
the cover.
Replace the battery
with a new CR2025
battery.
Close the cover.
Using multi-zone configuration
111 En
Advanced
Operation
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio/video system.
The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this unit to
reproduce separate input sources in the main zone, second zone
(Zone 2), third zone (Zone 3), and forth zone (Zone 4). You can
control this unit from the second, third, or forth zone using the
supplied remote control.
This unit can control the audio and video system in the main zone
and up to 3 optional zone (Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4), and you can
use the internal amplifiers or external amplifiers in Zone 2, Zone 3,
or Zone 4.
The multi-zone system configuration differs depending on your
requirements and equipment. Before connecting the speakers and/or
external amplifiers for the multi-zone configuration, plan the total
design of your multi-zone system.
When you plan the system, consider the following points:
1. Do you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit or
external amplifiers?
2. How many zones do you want to use this unit for?
3. How many channels do you want to use in the main zone?
4. If you use the internal amplifiers for the other zones, you
cannot use some channels in the main zone in some cases.
5. How many speakers do you have?
6. Do you want to use the visual sources other than the main
zone?
y
Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone
configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha
dealer or service center for the planning and setup of the multi-zone system that best
meet your requirements.
In the following instruction, following system configuration is the
example. When you use this system configuration, you can enjoy
7.2-channel playback in the main zone and 2-channel playback in
the optional two zones. You can also enjoy 5.2-channel playback in
the main zone and 2-channel playback in the optional three zones.
Using multi-zone configuration
Step 1: Planning the multi-zone system
First, plan the total multi-zone system with this unit
carefully.
☞ P. 111
Step 2: Connecting the speakers and/
or external amplifiers
Wire cables between rooms and connect the component
and speakers to this unit.
☞ P. 112
Step 3: Set the zone parameters
Once you have finished the connections, turn on this unit
and then set the parameters in “Multi Zone” menu (see
page 91).
– Use “Zone SP Assign” to designate the speaker
terminals on this unit to each zone.
☞ P. 116
– Use “Zone2 Set”, “Zone3 Set”, or “Zone4 Set”
parameters to set the volume settings and other
functions in each zone.
☞ P. 91
Step1: Planning the multi-zone system
Pre-amplifier mode
If you want use the external amplifiers for the all channels in the
main zone, you can use all the speaker terminals on this unit for
Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4 (Pre-amplifier mode). Set
“PREAMP MODE” to “ON” in the advanced setup (see
page 120).
MASTER
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
MIC
OPTIMIZER
AUDIO
SELECT
SPEAKERS
AB
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
ON/OFF
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MULTI
ZONE
STRAIGHT TUNING MODE
ZONE ON/OFF
MENU
TONE CONTROL
ZONE
CONTROLS
REC OUT/
ZONE 2
MEMORY FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
EFFECT DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO
CATEGORY
SEARCH MODE
PUSH ENTER
PROGRAM
R
L
OPTICAL
HDMI IN USB
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 3 ZONE 4
ZONE 2
Speakers you can use simultaneously
Speakers you can use alternately. If you turn on
Zone 4, the surround back speakers in the main
zone do not output sounds.
This unit
Main zone
Zone 2
Zone 3Zone 4
Using multi-zone configuration
112 En
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4.
• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone
4 to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).
• An amplifier and speakers for Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4.
• A video monitor for the second room.
■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit
To make the system of the example, connect the speakers in the
main zone and other zones as follows:
You can assign the following speaker terminals to Zone 2, Zone 3,
and/or Zone 4 freely.
Step2: Connecting the speakers, external amplifiers, and/or other components
Important safety notice
The speaker terminals of this amplifier should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per
channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load
resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on
the back panel of your amplifier.
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/
ZONE
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B/
ZONE
FRONT A
CENTER
EXTRA SP
A
B
+
R
SPEAKERS
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B/
ZONE
FRONT A
EXTRA SP
A
B
+
L
Zone 2
Zone 3
Main zone
surround
Main zone
surround
back
Zone 4
Main zone
front
Main zone
center
Right speaker
terminals
Left speaker
terminals
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL OUTDOCK
ZONE OUTVIDEO OUTVIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
MULTI CH INPUT
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
REMOTE
AUDIO OUT AUDIO INAUDIO IN
HDMI
NETWORK
USB
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
ZONE
DVR
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
VCRVCR DVR
VCR CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R CD TUNER
PHONO
MD/TAPE
DVR
DVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SURROUNDSB (8CH)
1
2
+12v
15mA MAX.
1
2
OUT 2OUT 1
BD/HD DVD
CD-R
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
CENTER
EXTRA SP
DVR
CBL/SAT
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
A
B
C
D
1 2 3 4 5 4 5
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
VCRDVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
1 2 3 4 5 45
+ +
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
SPEAKERS
RS-2
TRI
O
REM
IN
OUT
IN
1
2
+12v
15mA
1
2
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
EXTRA SP
+
R
SPEAKERS
TAL OUT
L
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
R
D
E
T
L
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
+
L
Using multi-zone configuration
113 En
Advanced
Operation
■ Using external amplifiers
When you use the external amplifiers in the Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4, connect the external amplifiers to the ZONE OUT jacks of this
unit with the analog audio cables.
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
• Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room when “Zone2 Volume”, “Zone3 Volume”, or “Zone4 Volume” are set to “Fixed” (see page 91).
■ Using the ZONE DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack
When you connect an external amplifier in Zone 2 to the ZONE DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack, you can play back the digital and analog
audio sources in Zone 2.
Audio signal flow for Zone 2
• Even if you set “Zone2 Volume” to “Variable” (see page 91), the volume control on this unit does not function to the output level of the ZONE DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack.
• When this unit plays back the copy-protected audio files, this unit does not output any audio signals at the ZONE DIGITAL OUT jack.
Notes
Compatible audio signals in the Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4
When you connect the external amplifiers in Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4 to the ZONE OUT jacks on this unit, this unit can transmit the
analog audio signals only. In this setting, this unit cannot play back the digital audio sources input at the DIGITAL IN jacks and HDMI IN
jacks in Zone 2, Zone 3, and/or Zone 4.
y
When this unit is in the party mode (see page 118), this unit can output the audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks or DIGITAL IN jacks at the ZONE OUT jacks.
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL OUTDOCK
ZONE OUTVIDEO OUTVIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
MULTI CH INPUT
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
REMOTE
AUDIO OUT AUDIO INAUDIO IN
HDMI
NETWORK
USB
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
ZONE
DVR
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
VCRVCR DVR
VCR CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R CD TUNER
PHONO
MD/TAPE
DVR
DVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SURROUNDSB (8CH)
1
2
1
2
OUT 2OUT 1
BD/HD DVD
CD-R
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
CENTER
EXTRA SP
DVR
CBL/SAT
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
A
B
C
D
1 2 3 4 5 4 5
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
VCRDVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
1 2 3 4 5 45
+ +
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
L R L R L R
This unit
Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4
Other amplifierOther amplifierOther amplifier
Audio in Audio in Audio in
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL OUTDOCK
ZONE OUTVIDEO OUTVIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
MULTI CH INPUT
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
REMOTE
AUDIO OUT AUDIO INAUDIO IN
HDMI
NETWORK
USB
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
ZONE
DVR
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
VCRVCR DVR
VCR CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R CD TUNER
PHONO
MD/TAPE
DVR
DVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SURROUNDSB (8CH)
1
2
1
2
OUT 2OUT 1
BD/HD DVD
CD-R
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
CENTER
EXTRA SP
DVR
CBL/SAT
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
A
B
C
D
1 2 3 4 5 4 5
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
VCRDVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
1 2 3 4 5 45
+ +
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL
ZONE
C
Coaxial in
ZONE
(COAXIAL)
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL
AUDIO IN
ZONE OUT
Input Output
Notes
Using multi-zone configuration
114 En
■ Connecting Zone video monitor
Connect the video monitor(s) in Zone 2 to the ZONE OUT VIDEO and/or ZONE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. If you connect the
multiple zone video monitors to ZONE OUT VIDEO and/or ZONE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, the video monitors play back the
same source simultaneously.
■ Video signal up-conversion to the zone component video signals
Low-quality video signals input at the VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks may not be output at the ZONE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO jacks correctly.
Note
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL OUTDOCK
ZONE OUTVIDEO OUTVIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
MULTI CH INPUT
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
REMOTE
AUDIO OUT AUDIO INAUDIO IN
HDMI
NETWORK
USB
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
ZONE
DVR
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
VCRVCR DVR
VCR CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R CD TUNER
PHONO
MD/TAPE
DVR
DVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SURROUNDSB (8CH)
1
2
1
2
OUT 2OUT 1
BD/HD DVD
CD-R
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
CENTER
EXTRA SP
DVR
CBL/SAT
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
A
B
C
D
1 2 3 4 5 4 5
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
VCRDVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
1 2 3 4 5 45
+ +
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
ZONE OUT
PRPBY
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
PRPBY
VV
This unit
Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4
Zone monitorZone monitorZone monitor
Source component
Video in Video in
Component
in
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Using multi-zone configuration
115 En
Advanced
Operation
■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT and TRIGGER OUT jacks for Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4
You can use the REMOTE IN/OUT and TRIGGER OUT jacks on this unit for Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4 as well as the main zone. Refer to
“Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks” and “Using the TRIGGER OUT jacks” on page 36 for more information.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
This unit is equipped with two REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks. You can use the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks to control this unit or other
component from Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4.
The following diagram shows an example of the connections.
y
Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six Yamaha
components can be connected as shown.
TRIGGER OUT jacks
This unit is equipped with two TRIGGER OUT jacks. You can turn on and off the component corresponding to the selection of the input
source of the desired zone or turning on and off the desired zone. Use “Trigger Output” in “Manual Setup” to set the functions of the
TRIGGER OUT jacks (see page 94).
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL OUTDOCK
ZONE OUTVIDEO OUTVIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
MULTI CH INPUT
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
REMOTE
AUDIO OUT AUDIO INAUDIO IN
HDMI
NETWORK
USB
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
ZONE
DVR
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
VCRVCR DVR
VCR CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R CD TUNER
PHONO
MD/TAPE
DVR
DVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SURROUNDSB (8CH)
1
2
1
2
OUT 2OUT 1
BD/HD DVD
CD-R
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
CENTER
EXTRA SP
DVR
CBL/SAT
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
A
B
C
D
1 2 3 4 5 4 5
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
VCRDVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
1 2 3 4 5 45
+ +
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
REMOTE
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
This unit
Remote control
signal in
Remote control
signal in
DVD player (etc.)
CD player (etc.)
Zone 2
Zone 3
Infrared signal
receiver
Remote control
Remote control
signal out
Remote control
signal out
Remote
control
External amplifier
OUTOUT
IN
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
OUT
IN
REMOTE
REMOTE
This unit
Yamaha component
Yamaha component
Infrared signal
receiver
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL OUTDOCK
ZONE OUTVIDEO OUTVIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AC OUTLET
ZONE OUT PRE OUT
AC IN
GND
MULTI CH INPUT
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
REMOTE
AUDIO OUT AUDIO INAUDIO IN
HDMI
NETWORK
USB
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
(SINGLE)
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
ZONE
DVR
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
P
RPBY
CBL/SAT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
VCRVCR DVR
VCR CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R CD TUNER
PHONO
MD/TAPE
DVR
DVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT (6CH) CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND CENTER
(FRONT) (SINGLE)
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SURROUNDSB (8CH)
1
2
1
2
OUT 2OUT 1
BD/HD DVD
CD-R
DVD
DVR
DVD
DTV
CD
MD/TAPE
CBL/SAT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
EXTRA SP
REAR
PRESENCE
/ZONE
FRONT
PRESENCE
/ZONE
SURROUND
SUR. BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT B
/ZONE
FRONT A
CENTER
EXTRA SP
DVR
CBL/SAT
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
A
B
C
D
1 2 3 4 5 4 5
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
VCRDVRDTVDVD
CBL/SAT
1 2 3 4 5 45
+ +
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
This unit
Projector (etc.) in the
main zone
Zone 2 (etc.)
Power amplifier (etc.)
Trigger in
Trigger in
Using multi-zone configuration
116 En
After the connection, turn on this unit and then set the assignment of
the speaker terminals and other zone parameters.
■ Assigning the zone speakers
Use “Zone SP Assign” to set the zone that each speaker terminal are
used for.
1 Press IMENU on the remote control.
The top GUI menu appears in the video monitor.
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Manual Setup”
and then 9h.
3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Multi Zone” and
then 9h.
“Multi Zone” menu appears in the GUI screen.
4 Press9k / n repeatedly to select “Zone SP Assign”
and then press 9h.
Following display appears in the GUI screen.
5 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
speaker terminals and then 9l / h repeatedly to
select the desired zone you want to use the speaker
connected to the selected speaker terminals.
When “PREAMP MODE” in the advanced setup is set to
“OFF” (see page 120), “FRONT”, “CENTER”, “SUR.” and
“S.BACK” are fixed to “M” (the main zone).
To make the system of the example (see page 111), set “Zone
SP Assign” as follows:
Speaker terminal indications
F.PRNS: FRONT PRESENCE speaker terminals
EXTRA: EXTRA SP speaker terminals
FRONT: FRONT A speaker terminals
CENTER: CENTER speaker terminals
SUR.: SURROUND speaker terminals
S.BACK: SUR.BACK speaker terminals
R.PRNS: REAR PRESENCE speaker terminals
6 Once you have finished the settings of all the
speaker terminals, press 9ENTER to confirm the
setting and exit from the “Zone SP Assign” screen.
7 Set other zone parameters appropriately.
See pages 91 and 92 for details.
8 Once you have finished the settings of the zone
parameters, press IMENU to exit the GUI menu.
You can select the zone you want to control by using the control
buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.
■ Basic operation
Front panel operations
1 Press
K
ZONE 2,
K
ZONE 3, or
K
ZONE 4 on the
front panel to individually turn on or off Zone 2, Zone
3, or Zone 4.
2 Press
K
ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel
repeatedly to select the zone you want to control.
Each time you press
K
ZONE CONTROLS, the front panel
display changes as shown below, and the indicator for the
currently selected zone flashes for approximately 10 seconds.
However, no indicator flashes when the main zone is selected.
ZONE2
Controls the Zone 2 functions.
ZONE3
Controls the Zone 3 functions.
ZONE4
Controls the Zone 4 functions.
y
• You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the selected zone flashes
in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is
automatically canceled. In this case, press KZONE CONTROLS again.
• The initial setting is ZONE2 when Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4 are turned on.
Step3: Setting the zone parameter
M234
F.PRNS
EXTRA
FRONT
CENTER
SUR.
S.BACK
R.PRNS
Speaker B
Zone SP Assign
Party Mode Set
Zone2 Set
Zone: /
SP terminal: /
Exit: ENTER
M2 3 4
F.PRNS
EXTRA
FRONT
CENTER
SUR.
S.BACK
R.PRNS
Zone indications
M: Main zone
2: Zone 2
3: Zone 3
4: Zone 4
PREAMP MODE
When “PREAMP MODE” in the advanced setup is set to “ON”
(see page 120), you can assign all the speaker terminals of this
unit to Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4. The audio signals for the main
zone are only output at the PRE OUT jacks.
Controlling Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4
ZONE2
ZONE3 ZONE4
No indicator flashes when the main zone is
selected.
Using multi-zone configuration
117 En
Advanced
Operation
3 Perform the operations in the selected zone.
For further operations, refer to the following pages:
y
To turn off the desired zone, press KZONE 2, KZONE 3, or KZONE 4 again.
Remote control operations
1 Press
H
ZONE repeatedly to select the zone you
want to control.
“MAIN”, “ZONE 2”, “ZONE 3”, or “ZONE 4” indicator
appears in the display window (4) on the remote control.
2 Press EPOWER to turn on the selected zone.
3 Perform the operations in the selected zone.
For further operations, refer to the following pages:
y
To turn off the desired zone, press DSTANDBY.
■ Selecting the input source Zone 2, Zone 3, or
Zone 4
Rotate the
D
INPUT selector on the front panel (or set
the operation mode selector to
F
AMP and then press
one of the input selector buttons (
3
)) to select the input
source of the selected zone.
• Select “DOCK” as the input source to use the iPod features in
the selected zone. For details about the iPod operations, see
“Using iPod™” on page 64.
• Select “NET/USB” as the input source to use the network/USB
operations features in the selected zone. For details about the
iPod operations, see “Using Network/USB features” on page 66.
• The selected input sources are shared across all zones.
• If you set the recording source other than “SOURCE” (see page 62), the input source
of Zone 2 is fixed to the source you set as the recording source.
■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2, Zone 3, or
Zone 4
Rotate EVOLUME on the front panel (or press
JVOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume level of the
selected zone.
y
Press
L
MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output to the selected zone.
When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3,
J
VOLUME +/– can be
used only when “Zone2 Volume”, “Zone3 Volume”, or “Zone4 Volume” is set to
“Variable” in “Zone2 Set”, “Zone3 Set”, or “Zone4 Set” (see page 91).
■ Setting the sleep timer for Zone 2, Zone 3, or
Zone 4
Use this feature to turn off the desired zone to the standby mode
after a contain amount of time.
Set the operation mode selector to FAMP on the remote
control and then press CSLEEP repeatedly to set the
amount of time.
Each time you press CSLEEP, the sleep timer setting changes as
shown below.
Descriptions
Page
“Selecting the input source Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4” 117
“Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4” 117
“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4” 118
Descriptions
Page
“Selecting the input source Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4” 117
“Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4” 117
“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4” 118
MAIN
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
ZONE 4
(Zone 2) (Zone 3) (Zone 4)
(Main zone)
Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4
operation mode.
Notes
Note
120min. 90min.
60min.30min.OFF
Using multi-zone configuration
118 En
■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2, Zone 3, or
Zone 4
1 Press MTONE CONTROL on the front panel.
2 Press IPROGRAM repeatedly to select the high-
frequency response (TREBLE), the low-frequency
response (BASS).
3 Rotate IPROGRAM to adjust the high-frequency
response (BASS).
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
■ Using the Zone OSD
You can browse and select the iPod or network/USB contents by
using the Zone OSD.
1 Set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE and
then press the desired input selector button (3).
2 Press KDISPLAY on the remote control to turn on
the Zone OSD.
3 Press 9k / n / l / h and 9ENTER repeatedly to
navigate the menu on the Zone OSD.
• The OSD menu appears in English even if you set “LANGUAGE” to “JAPANESE”
or “RUSSIAN” (see page 120).
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the
OSD of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores “_”.
• You can set the time for which the Zone OSD is displayed in the Zone video monitor
by using “On Screen” in “Manual Setup” (see page 90).
y
• Short message displays are also appears in the Zone video monitor. Use “Zone OSD”
in “Manual Setup” to select that this unit displays the operational information of all
zones or Zone 2 only (see page 92).
• You can display the status of the selected zone. Set the operation mode selector to
F
AMP and then press
K
DISPLAY.
Use this feature to play the main zone sources in the other zones
simultaneously. This feature is useful to play back a back ground
music in multiple zone in a home party.
1,2,3 ··· In the party mode, this unit distributes the same sources
to the zones which join the party mode.
4 ··· You can also operate the specific zone separately when
this unit is in the party mode.
Turning on the party mode
Press CPA RT Y on the remote control to turn on the
party mode.
“PARTY MODE ON” appears in the front panel display and then
the main zone and the zones which join the party mode are turned
on.
Turning off the party mode
Press CPA RT Y again to turn off the party mode.
“PARTY MODE OFF” appears in the front panel display and then
the main zone and the zones that joins the party mode are turned off.
y
When this unit is in the party mode, the audio signals that is input at the HDMI IN jacks
or DIGITAL IN jacks are output at the ZONE OUT jacks.
• If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, this unit does not output any sounds
when this unit is in the party mode.
• When you change the input source of the zone that joins the party mode, the input
source of the main zone also changes same as the operated zone.
• When this unit is in the party mode, no signals are not output at the OUT (REC)
jacks.
Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4
operation mode.
Notes
>
>
>
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
USB
TOP
>
>
>
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
USB
TOP
Using the party mode
Before performing the following operations, set the operation mode selector on the
remote control to
F
AMP.
Notes
Selecting the zones joining the party mode
You can select the zone that joins the party mode by using the
“Party Mode Set” parameters. If a zone does not join the party
mode, you can play back a source in the zone independently
from the main zone. See page 91 for details.
MASTER
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
MIC
OPTIMIZER
AUDIO
SELECT
SPEAKERS
AB
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
ON/OFF
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MULTI
ZONE
STRAIGHT TUNING MODE
ZONE ON/OFF
MENU
TONE CONTROL
ZONE
CONTROLS
REC OUT/
ZONE 2
MEMORY FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
EFFECT DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO
CATEGORY
SEARCH MODE
PUSH ENTER
PROGRAM
R
L
OPTICAL
HDMI IN USB
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 3 ZONE 4
ZONE 2
12
3
4
Advanced setup
119 En
Advanced
Operation
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display.
The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and
customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in
bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
• The settings you make are reflected next time you press
B
MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see page 39).
• Only
B
MASTER ON/OFF and
I
PROGRAM are effective while you are using
the advanced setup menu.
• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup
menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
1 Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this
unit.
2 Press and hold
I
PROGRAM and then press
B
MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to
turn on this unit.
Press and hold
I
PROGRAM until “ADVANCED SETUP” appears
in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the
I
PROGRAM to select the parameter you
want to adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display.
4 Push
I
PROGRAM repeatedly to change the
selected parameter setting.
5 Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to
the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off
this unit.
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit.
■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches
that of your speakers.
■ Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signal-receiving capability of
the remote control sensor on the front panel of this unit.
We recommend setting the parameter to “ON” in most cases.
■ Wake on RS-232C access RS-232C STANDBY
Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C interface
when this unit is in the standby mode.
■ Network standby NET STANDBY
Use this feature to select whether this unit accepts the commands via LAN
network when this unit is in the standby mode (see page 101).
If you set “NET STANDBY” to “YES”, the amount of power consumption in the
standby mode is increased.
■ Remote control ID setting REMOTE CON AMP
Use this feature to set the remote control ID of this unit for remote control
recognition.
Setting remote control ID
Use this feature to set the remote control ID. This feature is useful when you
control multiple Yamaha AV receiver or amplifier with using the remote
control.
Press GID repeatedly using a ballpoint pen or similar
object on the remote control to select the desired remote
control ID.
Each time you press GID, the remote control ID indicator changes as shown
below.
y
To set the remote control ID of the simplified remote control, see page 110 for details.
Advanced setup
Notes
Using the advanced setup menu
Choice Descriptions
8ΩMIN
Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω.
The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.
6ΩMIN
Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω.
The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.
Choice Descriptions
ON
Select this setting if you want to activate the signal-
receiving capability of the remote control sensor.
OFF
Select this setting if you want to deactivate the signal-
receiving capability of the remote control sensor.
Note
Choice Functions
YES
Select this setting to set this unit to transmit data via the
RS-232C interface.
NO
Select this setting to set this unit not to transmit data via
the RS-232C interface.
Choice Functions
YES
Accepts the operations via LAN network when this unit
is in the standby mode.
NO
Does not accept the operations via LAN network when
this unit is in the standby mode.
Note
Choice Descriptions
ID1
Select this setting when the ID of the remote control is set
to “ID1”.
ID2
Select this setting when the ID of the remote control is set
to “ID2”.
ID
ID1
ID2
ID
Advanced setup
120 En
■ Cooling fan operation mode FAN MODE
Use this feature to set the operation of the cooling fan of this unit.
■ Bi-amplifier mode BI-AMP
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier function.
When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, the SUR.BACK/BI-AMP terminals cannot be used to
connect surround back speakers in that the SUR.BACK/BI-AMP terminals are already
used for the bi-amplifier connection (see page 27).
■ Pre-amplifier mode PREAMP MODE
Use this feature to select whether you use this unit as the pre-amplifier in the
main zone and use all the internal amplifiers for the other zones.
■ Recovery and backup of the system settings
RECOV./BACKUP
Use this feature to save and restore the settings of this unit.
• This unit does not save the preset network/USB items, and system memory settings.
• If no settings are saved, you cannot select “RECOVERY”.
■ Parameter initialization INITIALIZE
Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the initial factory
settings. You can select the category of parameters to be initialized.
• Use “Initialize” in the sound field program menu to initialize the parameters of the
desired program (see page 81).
• When the network settings are reset, “DHCP” in “Network” is automatically set to
“On” (see page 92) and the registered client ID of this unit on your Yamaha MCX-
2000 is cleared (see page 68).
■ MAC address filter MAC FILTER
Use this feature to filter the access to this unit via LAN to control this unit
by the MAC address of the accessing PC (see page 101).
y
You can register the MAC address that is allowed to access when “MAC FILTER” is set
to “ON” by using the Web browser (see page 101).
■ TV format TV FORMAT
Use this feature to set the color encoding format of your television.
Choices: NTSC, PAL
Initial setting:
[General and Korea models]: NTSC
[Other models]: PAL
This setting is applied to the video monitor in the main zone, Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone
4.
■ HDMI monitor check MONITOR CHECK
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check function of this
unit.
■ Language LANGUAGE
Use this feature to select the language of your choice that appears in the GUI
(graphical user interface) menu, OSD display in the zone monitor and the
messages that appear in the front panel display.
Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE (Japanese), FRENCH
(French), GERMAN (German), SPANISH (Spanish), RUSSIAN
(Russian)
You can also select the language setting by using GUI menu. See page 95 for details.
··· The selected language is displayed.
— ··· The selected language is not displayed. The menu items and
messages are displayed in English.
See page 119 for the operation of the advanced setup.
Choice Descriptions
AUTO
Select this setting to set the fan to operate automatically
according to the temperature of this unit.
CONT.
Select this setting to set the fan to activate continuously
regardless of the temperature of this unit.
Choice Descriptions
ON
Select this setting if you want to activate the bi-amplifier
function.
OFF
Select this setting if you want to deactivate the bi-
amplifier function.
Note
Choice Descriptions
ON
Select this setting when you use this unit as the pre-
amplifier in the main zone. The audio signals for the
main zone are only output at the PRE OUT jacks of this
unit. You can assign all speaker terminals for the other
zones.
OFF
Select this setting to use the internal amplifiers of this
unit for the main zone, Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4.
Choice Select
RECOVERY
Restoring the saved setting of this unit.
BACKUP
Saves the current settings of this unit.
CANCEL
Cancels the recovery or backup of the settings of this
unit.
Notes
Choice Descriptions
DSP PARAM
Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of
the sound field parameters (see page 77).
VIDEO
Select this setting except “Short Message” and “On
Screen” (see page 90).
NETWORK
Select this setting except “Short Message” and “On
Screen” (see page 90).
ALL
Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of
this unit.
CANCEL
Select this setting to cancel the initialization
procedure.
Notes
Choice Descriptions
ON
Only allows to accept the access from the PC whose
MAC address is registered to this unit.
OFF
Allows to accept the access from any PC.
Note
Choice Descriptions
YES
This unit receives the information of the available video
signal resolutions from the video monitor connected via
HDMI and you can only select the resolutions supported
by the video monitor in “HDMI Resolution” (see
page 90).
SKIP
You can select any resolution in “HDMI Resolution”.
Note
LANGUAGE GUI menu
Front panel
display
Zone OSD
RUSSIAN
—
JAPANESE
——
Other languages
Additional Information
Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 122
Glossary ................................................................................. 128
THX information ................................................................................................... 130
Sound field program information .......................................................................... 131
Parametric equalizer information ......................................... 135
Block diagrams ...................................................................... 136
Specifications ........................................................................ 138
Index ........................................................................................ 140
List of remote control codes ................................................. 144
Additional Information
Troubleshooting
122 En
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction
below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
■ General
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy See page
This unit fails to turn on or
enters the standby mode
soon after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the plug is not
completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
39
The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on
all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection
does not touch anything other than its respective connection.
23
This unit has been exposed to a strong external
electric shock (such as lightning or strong static
electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable,
plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally.
—
No sound. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables
may be defective.
30-38
Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”, “Coax/
Opt” or “Analog”.
Set the audio input jack select to “Auto”.
52
Audio input jack select is set to “Analog” while
the input source component outputs digital audio
signals.
Set the audio input jack select to “Auto” or
“Coax/Opt”.
52
No appropriate input source has been selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the
D
INPUT selector
on the front panel (or the input selector buttons (3) on the
remote control).
50
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
23
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
—
The front speakers to be used have not been
selected properly.
Select the front speakers by pressing GSPEAKER A or
GSPEAKER B on the front panel.
51
The sound is muted.
Press
L
MUTE or
J
VOLUME +/– on the remote control to
resume audio output and then adjust the volume.
52
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input
from a source component, such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit.
—
The HDMI components connected to this unit do
not support the HDCP copy protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
28
“Support Audio” is set to “Other” and HDMI
audio signals are not being played back on this
unit.
Set “Support Audio” in “Option” to “DSP-Z11”.
94
No picture. The output and input for the picture are connected
to different types of video jacks.
Set “Conversion” to “On” or connect your source components
in the same way as you connect your video monitor to this unit.
89
This unit outputs the video signals are not
supported in the video monitor connected to the
HDMI OUT jack.
Set the “INITIALIZE” to “VIDEO” to reset the video
parameters.
120
Set “MONITOR CHECK” to “YES”.
120
Input selector setting of the video monitor is
incorrect.
Set the input source selector setting of the video monitor
appropriately.
—
Pure Direct mode is active. Turn off the Pure Direct mode.
—
Set “Pure Direct” in “Sound” to “Video On”.
89
Non-standard video signals are input.
The HDMI OUT jack that the video monitor is
connected is not selected.
Press CHDMI OUT on the remote control repeatedly.
51
Short message displays in
the main zone do not
appear in the video
monitor.
“Short Message” is set to “Off”. Set “Short Message” to “On”.
90
“Conversion” is set to “Off”. Set “Conversion” to “On”.
89
The signals input at the HDMI input jacks are
being output at the HDMI OUT jack.
The sound suddenly goes
off.
The protection circuitry has been activated because
of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.
39, 119
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and
then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted.
Press
L
MUTE or
J
VOLUME +/– on the remote control to
resume audio output.
52
Troubleshooting
123 En
Additional
Information
Sound is heard from the
speaker on one side only.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables
may be defective.
23
Incorrect settings in “Speaker Level”. Adjust the “Speaker Level” settings.
86
Only the center speaker
outputs substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA
DSP program, the source signal is directed to the
center channel, and the front and surround
speakers output effect sounds.
No sound is heard from the
center speaker.
“
Center
” in “
Speaker Set
” is set to “
None
”.
Set “Center” to “Small” or “Large”.
84
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for “11ch
Stereo”) has been selected and analog 2-channel
source is being input.
Try another sound field program if you want to output sound
from the center speaker.
54
No sound is heard from the
presence speakers.
The sound field programs are turned off.
Press
H
STRAIGHT to turn them on.
60
You are using a source or program combination
that does not output sound from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
50
No sound is heard from the
surround speakers.
“
Surround
” in “
Speaker Set
” is set to “
None
”.
Set “Surround” to “Small” or “Large”.
84
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a
source which does not contain the surround
channel signals is being played back.
Press
H
STRAIGHT on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT”
disappears from the front panel display.
60
No sound is heard from the
subwoofer.
“Bass Out” in “Speaker Set” is set to “Front” when
a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played.
Set “Bass Out” to “SWFR” or “Front & SWFR”.
85
“Bass Out” in “Speaker Set” is set to “SWFR” or
“Front” when a 2-channel source is being played.
Set “Bass Out” to “Front & SWFR”.
85
The source does not contain low-frequency
signals.
No sound is heard from the
surround back speakers.
“Surround” in “Speaker Set” is set to “None” and
“Surround Back” is automatically set to “None”.
Set “Surround” and “Surround Back” to a setting other than
“None”.
84
“Surround Back” in “Speaker Set” is set to
“None”.
Set “Surround Back” to a setting other than “None”.
84
The audio input sources
cannot be played in the
desired digital audio signal
format. (Desired input
source indicator or
decoder indicator in the
front panel display does
not light up.)
The connected component is not set to output
Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions
for your component.
—
Audio input jack select is set to “Analog”. Set the audio input jack select to “Auto”.
52
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the
cables may be defective.
—
No connection from the turntable to the GND
terminal.
Connect the grounding cable of the turntable to the GND
terminal on this unit.
34
The volume level is low
while a record is being
played.
The record is being played on a turntable with an
MC cartridge.
Connect the turntable to this unit through an MC-head amplifier.
34
The volume level cannot
be increased, or the sound
is distorted.
The component connected to the AUDIO OUT
jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power of the component.
—
The sound effect cannot
be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect with a
recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the DIGITAL
OUTPUT jack.
The source component is not connected to the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks on this unit.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks.
31, 34
Some components cannot record Dolby Digital or
DTS sources.
A source cannot be
recorded by an analog
component connected to
the AUDIO OUT jacks.
The source component is not connected to the
analog AUDIO IN jacks on this unit.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks.
34
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings of this unit
cannot be changed.
“Memory Guard” in “Option” is set to “On”. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”.
94
This unit does not operate
properly.
The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an
external electric shock (such as lightning or
excessive static electricity) or by a power supply
with low voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then
plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
Problem Cause Remedy See page
Troubleshooting
124 En
■ Remote control
■ HDMI
■ Network and USB
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front panel
display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
23
There is noise interference
from digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded
signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly enters
the standby mode.
The internal temperature becomes too high and the
overheat protection circuitry has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it
back on.
—
Problem Cause Remedy See page
Problem Cause Remedy See page
The remote control does
not work or function
properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6
m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front
panel.
12
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of
fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote
control sensor of this unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
11
The batteries do not last long and get quickly
exhausted.
Using alkaline batteries is strongly recommended.
—
Set the backlight mode to “OFF”.
104
The operation mode selector is set incorrectly. Set the operation mode selector correctly.
When operating this unit, set it to the
F
AMP position.When
operating the component selected by the input selector button,
set it to the
F
SOURCE position. When operating the TV, set it
to the
F
TV position.
—
The remote control code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using
“List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
104
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using “List
of remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
104
The remote control ID of the remote control and
this unit do not match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit and the remote control.
104
The remote control does
not work or function
properly.
Even if the remote control code is correctly set,
there are some models that do not respond to the
remote control.
Program the necessary functions independently into the
programmable buttons using the Learn feature.
105
The remote control does
not learn new functions.
The batteries of this remote control and/or the
other remote control are too weak.
Replace the batteries.
11
The distance between the two remote controls is
too much or too little.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
105
The signal coding or modulation of the other
remote control is not compatible with this remote
control.
Learning is not possible.
—
Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new
functions.
109
Problem Cause Remedy See page
No picture or sound
The number of the connected HDMI components
is over the limit.
Reduce the number of the connected HDMI components.
—
HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support the HDCP
copy protection standards.
—
Problem Cause Remedy See page
The PC server/MCX-2000/
Internet Radio does not
function properly.
The IP address is not set properly. Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON.
Alternately, perform manual configuration according to the
current operating environment.
92
The network cable is not connected. Connect it properly.
37
Troubleshooting
125 En
Additional
Information
The music in the PC server
cannot be played back.
The PC does not have Windows Media Player 11
or Windows Media Connect 2.0 installed in it.
Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media
Connect 2.0 in the PC.
—
The music is recorded in a format that cannot be
played on this unit. This unit cannot play music
formats other than WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC,
and WAV (PCM format). Also note that it cannot
play certain music files even if these are recorded
in the WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, or WAV
format.
Play music recorded in a format that this unit is compatible
with.
—
The MusicCAST server cannot
be connected.
You are attempting to connect to MCX-1000. The
MusicCAST server that can be connected by this
unit is MCX-2000.
Use MCX-2000 or the PC server.
—
Auto Configuration is not executed. Execute “Auto Configure”.
68
“Disconnected” is displayed
even when a USB device is
present.
This unit recognized the USB storage device as
an illegal device.
Turn this unit off then on again.
69
The Internet Radio cannot be
played.
The firewall of the network device is activated.
The Internet Radio can be played only when it
passes through the port designated by each radio
station. The port number is variable depending on
radio station.
Check the firewall setting of the network device.
—
Connection to the Internet is disconnected. Check the configuration of the network device, and then
contact the network connection provider.
—
The music files and directories
in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The music files and directories are placed in
locations other than the FAT area.
Place music files and directories in the FAT area.
—
You are attempting to browse directory
hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory with
more than 500 files.
Modify the data structure on your USB device.
—
The USB device cannot be
recognized.
The connected USB device is USB portable audio
player.
Some devices may become easier to recognize when they
are inserted before turning this unit on.
69
This unit does not recall the
correct item by using numeric
buttons (1-8).
The connected USB device is incorrect. Connect the USB device that stores the preset item.
69
The directory that stores the selected item is
changed.
Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8) again.
70
This unit does not recall the
selected item by using numeric
buttons (1-8).
The USB device is not connected correctly. Connect the correct USB device properly.
37
The PC or MCX-2000 that stores the selected
item is turned off.
Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.
68
The selected Internet Radio station is temporary
unavailable or out of service.
Try again when the selected Internet Radio is providing the
service.
69
Preset other Internet Radio stations.
69
Problem Cause Remedy See page
Status message Cause Remedy See page
Please wait
(Starting Server)
This unit is in the middle of waking up MCX-2000
that has been set to the standby mode.
Wait for approximately 20 seconds.
—
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path from your
network to this unit.
Check the connection between this unit and the LAN port on
your router or hub.
37
Make sure your router is properly connected and turned on.
Also, make sure your modem is properly connected and turned
on when you are attempting to listen to Internet Radio.
37
Disconnected
Your USB storage device or USB portable audio
player has been disconnected from the USB port
on this unit.
Check the connection between this unit and your USB storage
device or USB portable audio player.
—
The PC server or MCX-2000 previously connected
to this unit no longer exists.
Connect this unit to the available PC server or MCX-2000.
68
There is a problem with the signal path from your
USB storage device or USB portable audio player
to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage device or
USB portable audio player to the USB port on this unit.
39
Try resetting your USB storage device or USB portable audio
player.
—
Access error
This unit cannot access your USB storage device
or USB portable audio player.
Try another USB storage device or USB portable audio player.
—
There is a problem with the signal path from your
USB storage device or USB portable audio player
to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage device or
USB portable audio player to the USB port on this unit.
39
Try resetting your USB storage device or USB portable audio
player.
—
Troubleshooting
126 En
■ iPod
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the video monitor, check the connection to your iPod (see page 36).
■ Auto Setup
Before Auto Setup
Unable to play
This unit cannot play back the songs currently
stored on your PC.
Make sure Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media
Connect 2.0 is installed on your PC.
—
Check that the songs currently stored on your PC are playable
(MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV).
—
Store some other playable music files (MP3, WMA, MPEG-4
AAC, and WAV) on your PC.
—
The network may be overloaded with heavy traffic,
and playback is interrupted.
Try preparing a network exclusively for use with this unit to
separate it from general network traffic.
—
License Unavailable
This unit cannot find the license key of the file. Acquire the license key of the file. For details, consult with the
supplier of the file.
—
List updated
The list of the contents stored on your PC server or
MCX-2000 has been updated.
Bookmark ON
(Bookmark OFF)
The desired Internet Radio station has been added
(removed) to the “Bookmarks” list.
Empty Memory!
No items are assigned to the selected numeric
button.
Assign the desired item to the numeric button.
70
Not found!
This unit cannot find the assigned item for the
selected numeric button.
Connect the USB device that stores the preset item.
—
Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.
68
Try again when the selected Internet Radio is providing the
service.
69
Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8) again.
70
USB Overloaded
Over current passes through the connected USB
device.
Turn off this unit and then disconnect the USB device. If the
message appears when you connect the USB device again, this
unit may not compatible with the USB device.
—
Status message Cause Remedy See page
Note
Status message Cause Remedy See page
Loading... This unit is in the middle of recognizing the
connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists
from your iPod.
Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your
iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock
to the DOCK terminal on this unit.
36
Try resetting your iPod.
—
Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are
supported.
—
iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a Yamaha iPod
universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of
this unit, and the connection between your iPod
and this unit is complete.
Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha iPod
universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such
as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal on
this unit.
36
Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently
stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable.
—
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.
—
Error message Cause Remedy See page
Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
43
Unplug Phones! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones.
—
No Setup Menu! No check items are selected as the measurement
items.
Select the desired check item. 44
Memory Guard! “Memory Guard” is set to “On”. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 94
Troubleshooting
127 En
Additional
Information
During Auto Setup
After Auto Setup
• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “Auto Setup” again.
• If warning “W2” or “W3” appears, the adjustment are made, however the adjustments may not be optimal.
• Depending on the speakers, warning “W1” may appears even if the speakers connections are correct.
• If error “E10” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified Yamaha service center.
■ Resetting the system
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial
factory settings.
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including
the GUI menu parameters.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any
changes, press
B
MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it
outward to the OFF position.
1 Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this
unit.
2 Press and hold
I
PROGRAM and then press
B
MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to
turn on this unit.
Press and hold IPROGRAM until “ADVANCED SETUP”
appears in the front panel display (see page 119).
3 Rotate
I
PROGRAM to select “INITIALIZE”.
4 Press
I
PROGRAM repeatedly to select “ALL”.
y
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without
making any changes.
• You can initialize the video parameters or sound field program
parameters separately. See page 120 for details.
5 Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to
the OFF position to confirm your selection and turn
off this unit.
Error message Cause Remedy See page
E01:No Front SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 23
E02:No Sur. SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 23
E03:No F. PRNS SP A front presence channel signal is not detected. Check the front presence speaker connections. 23
E04:SBR → SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. Connect the surround back speaker to the
SUR.BACK/BI-AMP (SINGLE) terminal if you
only have one surround back speaker.
23
E05:Noisy Background noise is too loud. Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet environment.
—
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the optimizer
microphone.
—
E06:Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, though
surround L/R speakers are not.
Connect surround speakers when you use surround
back speakers.
23
E07:No MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during
the “Auto Setup” procedure.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
43
E08:No R.PRNS SP A rear presence channel signal is not detected. Check the rear presence speaker connections. 23
E09:User Cancel The “Auto Setup” procedure was cancelled due to
user activity.
Run “Auto Setup” again. 42
E10:Internal Err. An internal error occurred. Run “Auto Setup” again. 42
Warning message Cause Remedy See page
W1:Out of Phase Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may
appear depending on the speakers even when the
speakers are connected correctly.
Check the speaker connections for proper polarity
(+ or –).
23
W2:Over Distance The distance between the speaker and the listening
position is over 24 m (80 ft).
Bring the speaker closer to the listening position.
—
W3:Level Error The difference of volume level among speakers is
excessive.
Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers
are set in locations with similar conditions.
—
Check the speaker connections. 23
Use speakers of similar quality.
—
Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 42
W4:SP Mismatch The result of the wiring check of “Auto Setup” is
different from “Speaker Set” in “Manual Setup”.
Use “Speaker Set” in “Manual Setup” to adjust the
speaker settings manually.
84
“Wiring” check procedure is skipped. Select “Wiring” in “Setup Menu”. 44
Notes
Notes
Glossary
128 En
■ Audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both
a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during
post-production and transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires
complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and
video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization
automatically and accurately without user interaction.
■ Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is
connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the
combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over
a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much
simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. The
internal crossover of the speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high
pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a cutoff and rejects
frequencies above the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its
cutoff.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal
for the luminance and the P
B and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is
independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because
the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component
input jacks is required in order to output component signals.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic
elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined.
■ Deep Color
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit
depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows
HDTVs and other displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between
colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray
between black and white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent
multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional
channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has
a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for
the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from
maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise
sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with
unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from
monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources.
This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the
original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie
sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel,
you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes
with “fly-over” and “fly-around” effects.
■ Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for high-definition
programming and media including HD broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc.
Selected as a mandatory audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard
for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete channel
output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1
discreet audio channels simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed
for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus
also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that
incorporate Dolby Digital.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing
Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback
with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right
channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology.
There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for
movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback
from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources
only) and “Game mode” for game sources.
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and
dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for
dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The
surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround
is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable
broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
■ Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition
disc-based media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio
standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this
technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a
high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby
TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV
receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with
the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby
Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control.
■ DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media,
such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-
frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are
used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio
signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that
offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on
DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a
96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-
bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-
channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion
picture soundtracks on DVD video.
■ DTS Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a
6.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters
around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your
home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically,
front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels
for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-
channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel
format.
■ DTS Express
DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the optional feature on Blu-ray Disc
or HD DVD, which offers high-quality, low bit rate audio optimized for network
streaming, and Internet applications. DTS Express is used for the Secondary Audio
feature of Blu-ray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD. These features deliver
audio commentaries (for example, the additional commentaries made by the director of
a film) on demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express signals are mixed
down with the main audio stream on the player component, and the component sends
the mixed audio stream to the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital coaxial, digital
optical, or analog connections.
■ DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-
definition disc-based media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a
mandatory audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers
sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home
theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5
Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of
24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for
the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master
Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that
incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
Glossary
Glossary
129 En
Additional
Information
■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution audio technology developed for
high-definition disc-based media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an
optional audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers
sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition
home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0
Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete
channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and
designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel
audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
■ HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported,
uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any
source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a
digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well
as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV
standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection),
HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of
content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the
HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is
from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-
frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in
Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ MP3
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the irreversible
compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data
of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data
quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music
CD.
■ MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. As it allows compression of data at a bit rate lower than
that of MPEG-2 AAC, it is used among others for mobile telephones, portable audio
players and other low-capacity devices requiring high sound quality.
In addition to the above types of devices, MPEG-4 AAC is also used to distribute
contents on the Internet, and as such is supported by computers, media servers and
many other devices.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel playback by the
specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized,
recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the
size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized
bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per
second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting
the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range
of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the
dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of
quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of
frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the
more finely the sound level can be reproduced.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable
is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video
signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
■ WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital
data obtained by converting audio signals. It does not specify the compression (coding)
method so a desired compression method can be used with it. By default, it is
compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression methods
including the ADPCM method.
■ WMA
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It employs the
irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning
out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of
compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar
audio quality to music CD.
■ xvYCC
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color
space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that could not be expressed
before. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, xvYCC
expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is
particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics.
Glossary
130 En
■ THX Ultra2
Before any home theatre component can be THX Ultra2 certified, it must incorporate
all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests.
Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra logo, which is your guarantee that the
Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years
to come. THX Ultra2 requirements cover every aspect of the product including pre-
amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the
digital and analog domain.
■ THX Cinema processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-
renowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’
personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres
and in your home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie
soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed
to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions. This same
soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not
changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX engineers developed
patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre
environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this
product, when “THX” appears in the front panel display, THX features are
automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).
THX Cinema mode
In this mode, THX Loudness Plus is designed around the industry-standard reference
mixing level as well as adding other proprietary THX technologies such as Adaptive
Decorrelation, Re-EQ, and Timbre Matching to recreate the theatrical experience at
home.
■ THX Music mode
THX Music modes provide the appropriate THX processing to enhance music
listening. THX Music applies a dedicated music profile of THX Loudness Plus,
designed around the varying mix levels in music sources which are often very different
than film or television sources. Additionally, THX Music applies Timbre Matching to
the surround speaker channels.
■ THX Games mode
THX Games mode gives the benefit of THX Loudness Plus, as well as other THX
proprietary features which provide the gamer with a more accurate listening experience
at lower levels, while maintaining all of the directional cues critical to gameplay.
■ THX Surround EX
Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX
Ltd.
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital
Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added
during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds
behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front
right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel
provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more
depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before.
Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when
released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby
web site at www.dolby.com.
Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the
THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home.
This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during the playback of
5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such case the
information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and
may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes
of the individual listener.
■ THX Ultra2 Cinema mode
THX Ultra2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers giving you the best
possible movie watching experience. In this mode, ASA processing blends the side
surround speakers and back surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient
and directional surround sounds. This mode permits the playback of a non Surround
EX/ES encoded 5.1 movie to be played back over a 7.1 system. DTS-ES (Matrix and
6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be
automatically detected, if the appropriate flag has been encoded. Some Dolby Digital
Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows automatic switching.
If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can
manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Ultra2 Cinema
mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.
■ THX Ultra2 Music mode
For the playback of multi-channel music the THX Ultra2 Music mode should be
selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all
5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a
wide stable rear soundstage.
■ THX Ultra2 Games mode
For the playback of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX Ultra2 Games mode
should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround
channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and
Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game audio surround information, providing a
full 360 degree playback environment. THX Ultra2 Games mode is unique as it gives
you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.
■ THX Loudness Plus
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in THX Ultra2
Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™ Certified receivers. With THX Loudness Plus, home
theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a surround mix at any volume
level. A consequence of turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound
elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX Loudness Plus
compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by
intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel levels and frequency response. This
enables users to experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume
setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in any THX
listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX Games modes are
tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of content.
THX information
Glossary
131 En
Additional
Information
■ Re-Equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when
played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed
to be played back in large movie theatres using very different professional equipment.
Re-Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a
small home environment.
■ Adaptive Decorrelation
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping
surround sound experience, but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers.
This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and
envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you
move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes
one surround channel’s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround
channel. This expands the listening position and creates – with only two speakers – the
same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.
■ Timbre Matching
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from
which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so
that the surround information is all around you. In a home theatre, you use only two
speakers located to the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal
characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless
panning between the front and surround speakers.
■ BGC (Boundary Gain Compensation)
If your chosen listening room layout (for practical or aesthetic reasons) results in the
most of the listeners being close to the rear wall, the resulting bass level can be
sufficiently reinforced by the boundary that the overall sound quality becomes
“boomy”. THX Ultra2 receivers and controllers contain the BGC (Boundary Gain
Compensation) feature to provide an improved bass balance. “Bndry Gain Comp” can
be selected by setting “THX Ultra2 SWFR” to “Yes” in “THX Set” of “Manual Setup”.
■ ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2
back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you
set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right,
Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and
Subwoofer), be sure to go to the “THX Set” screen and choose the setting that most
closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround sound-
field.
ASA is used in three modes; THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Ultra2 Music and THX Ultra2
Games.
■ Dialogue normalization
Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of Dolby Digital, which is used to
keep the programs at the same average listening level so the user does not have to
change the volume control between Dolby Digital programs.
When playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you
may see a brief message in the front panel display which will read “Dial Norm X dB”
(X being a numeric value). The display is showing how the program level relates with
THX calibration level. If you want to play the program at calibrated theatrical levels,
you may wish to adjust the volume. For example, if you see the following message:
“Dial Norm + 4 dB” in the front panel display, to keep the overall output level at THX
calibrated loudness, just turn down the volume control by 4 dB. However, unlike a
movie theater where the playback loudness is preset, you can choose your preferred
volume setting for best enjoyment.
■ Elements of a sound field
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections
from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections
enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in
which we are sitting.
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound
field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s
instrument.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct
sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the
walls, and the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic
afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to
determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the
digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in
your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The
acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a
room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field processor.
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie
theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic
effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers,
and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound
heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides
the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home
by using the Yamaha original sound field technology combined with various digital
audio systems.
■ CINEMA DSP HD³
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the
sound images. CINEMA DSP HD³ feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate
height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive stereoscopic
sound fields in a listening room.
■ SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate
representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP
sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual
surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal
two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker.
■ Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening
experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result,
flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass
due to the loss of low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance
of the overall sound system.
Sound field program information
Glossary
132 En
■ Sound output in each sound field program
Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the table below to understand the
speaker layout for each sound field program.
Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back. Furthermore, there may
be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as special sound effects, etc.
Note
Front left speaker Surround right speaker Front presence right speaker
Center speaker Surround back left speaker Rear presence left speaker
Front right speaker Surround back right speaker Rear presence right speaker
Surround left speaker Front presence left speaker
Speaker from which sound is being output
Speaker from which no sound is being output
L
SR
FPR
C
SBL
RPL
R
SBR
RPR
SL
FPL
Speaker settings
11-channel 5-channel
1
—
2
3
4
5
6
L
C
R
SL
SBRSBL
FPL FPR
RPL RPR
SR
L
C
R
SL
SBRSBL
SR
FPL FPR
RPL RPR
L
C
R
SL SR
L
C
R
SL
SBRSBL
SR
FPL FPR
RPL RPR
L
C
R
SL SR
L
C
R
SL
SBRSBL
SR
FPL FPR
RPL RPR
L
C
R
SL SR
L
C
R
SL
SBRSBL
SR
FPL FPR
RPL RPR
L
C
R
SL SR
L
C
R
SL
SBRSBL
SR
FPL FPR
RPL RPR
L
C
R
SL SR
Speaker settings
11-channel 5-channel
7
8
9
0
A
L
C
R
SL
SBRSBL
SR
FPL FPR
RPL RPR
L
C
R
SL SR
L
C
R
SL
SBRSBL
SR
FPL FPR
RPL RPR
L
C
R
SL SR
L
C
R
SL
SBRSBL
SR
FPL FPR
RPL RPR
L
C
R
SL SR
L
C
R
SL
SBRSBL
SR
FPL FPR
RPL RPR
L
C
R
SL SR
L
C
R
SL
SBRSBL
SR
FPL FPR
RPL RPR
L
C
R
SL SR
Glossary
133 En
Additional
Information
*1 / / : OFF
*2 / / : ON or discrete 6.1/7.1-channel audio signals are input.
q
EX
q
PL x
q
EX
q
PL x
Program HD³
Input audio source
2-channel (monaural)
2-channel (stereo)
5.1-channel*
1
6.1/7.1-channel*
2
CLASSICAL1
Hall in Munich A
Hall in Munich B
Hall in Frankfurt
Hall in Stuttgart
Hall in Vienna
Hall in Amsterdam
CLASSICAL2
Hall in USA A
Hall in USA B
Chamber
Church in Tokyo
Church in Freiburg
Church in Royaumont
LIVE/CLUB
Village Gate
Village Vanguard
The Bottom Line
Cellar Club
The Roxy Theatre
Warehouse Loft
Arena
ON 1134
OFF 2234
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
Music Video
Recital/Opera
Pavilion
Disco
Action Game
Roleplaying Game
MOVIE
Standard
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
Adventure
Drama
ON 3434
OFF
5434
MOVIE
Mono Movie
ON
3334
OFF
5634
STEREO
2ch Stereo
––
7777
STEREO
11ch Stereo
MUSIC ENHANCER
11ch Enhancer
––
4444
SUR.DECODE
Surround Decoder
(Pro Logic)
––
8990
SUR.DECODE
Surround Decoder
(PLIIx Movie/PLII Movie)
(PLIIx Game/PLII Game)
(Neo:6 Cinema)
––
8090
SUR.DECODE
Surround Decoder
(PLIIx Music/PLII Music)
(Neo:6 Music)
––
A090
THX
Cinema (Pro Logic)
––
8900
THX
Cinema (PLIIx Movie/PLII Movie/
Neo: 6 Cinema)
––
8000
THX
Music
––
A000
THX
Games
––
8000
STRAIGHT
Pure Direct
MUSIC ENHANCER
Straight Enhancer
––
7790
Glossary
134 En
■ Available parameters for each sound field program
Available sound field parameter may differ depending on the speaker settings.
Note
CLASSICAL1
Hall in Munich A
Hall in Munich B
Hall in Frankfurt
Hall in Stuttgart
Hall in Vienna
Hall in Amsterdam
CLASSICAL2
Hall in USA A
Hall in USA B
Chamber
Church in Tokyo
Church in Freiburg
Church in Royaumont
LIVE/CLUB
Village Gate
Village Vanguard
The Bottom Line
Cellar Club
The Roxy Theatre
Warehouse Loft
Arena
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
Music Video
Recital/Opera
Pavilion
Disco
Action Game
Roleplaying Game
MOVIE
Standard
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
Adventure
Drama
Mono Movie
STEREO
2ch Stereo
11ch Stereo
SUR. DECODE
Surround Decoder
THX
Cinema/Ultra2
Cinema/Surround EX
MUSIC ENHANCER
Straight Enhancer/
11ch Enhancer
Decoder Type
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Liveness
Sur. Init.Delay
Sur. Room Size
Sur. Liveness
SB. Init. Delay
SB. Room Size
SB. Liveness
Rev. Time
Rev. Delay
Rev. Level
Dialogue Lift
Decoder Type
Center Level
Surround L
Level
Surround R
Level
Sur.Back L
Level
Sur.Back R
Level
F.PRNS L
Level
F.PRNS R
Level
R.PRNS L
Level
R.PRNS R
Level
Direct
Level
Decoder
Parameters
Dialogue Lift
Parametric equalizer information
135 En
Additional
Information
This unit employs Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer
(YPAO) technology, together with the Parametric EQ settings (see
page 87), to optimize the frequency characteristics of its parametric
equalizer to match your listening environment. YPAO uses a
combination of the following three parameters (Frequency, Gain
and Q factor) to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency
characteristics.
■ Frequency
This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave increments between
32 Hz and 16 kHz.
■ Gain
This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB between –20
and +6 dB.
■ Q factor
The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as the Q
factor. This parameter is adjustable between the values 0.5 and 10.
YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your listening
requirements using a combination of the above three parameters
(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each equalizer band in this unit’s
parametric equalizer. This unit has 7 equalizer bands for each
channel.
The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise
adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2). This is not
possible using only a single equalizer band (as in Figure 1).
Figure 1
Figure 2
■ Standing wave
A wave generated when two waves of the same length, frequency
and speed but traveling in opposite directions overlap. Standing
waves appear to be stationary and simply oscillating in a fixed
position without progressing.
Under certain conditions, the sound leaving a speaker and the sound
reflecting off a wall, etc., in a room resonate. When this happens, it
has a major effect on the frequency response in the room, and
depending on the listening position sounds of specific frequencies
may sound loud or inversely may be hard to hear. As a result, this
hampers accurate reproduction of the sound source.
This unit is equipped with a parametric equalizer to reduce the
effect of standing waves. The equalizer’s settings can be optimized
through automatic measurements. Even more accurate settings can
be made by taking measurements at other positions.
Parametric equalizer information
Gain
Frequency
Original frequency
characteristic
Band 1
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Gain
Frequency
Band 1
Band 2
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Original frequency
characteristic
Block diagrams
136 En
■ Audio section
Block diagrams
CD
HD/BD DVD
DVD
DTV
MD /TAPE
DVD
CBL/SAT
DVR
IN (Front)
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
NET
REC/Zone
Selector
INPUT
Selector
DIT
HDMI
Selector
USB (Front)
USB (Rear)
PHY
USB
Selector
DIR
HDMI
Rx
NET/USB
Selector
Audio DAC
Decoder
Cinema
DSP
YPAO,
etc.
ZONE OUT/DVR
CD-R
OUT 1
OUT 2
HDMI
Tx
HDMI
Tx
Switch
Volume
PHONES
SUR BACK
REAR PRES
SURROUND
FRONT
FRONT PRES
CENTER (Mono)
SUB WOOFER
COAXIAL DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL DIGITAL IN
HDMI IN
NET
USB
Main
Zone
HDMI
DSP
HDMI
Main
Zone
Audio ADC
ZONE2/REC OUT (COAXIAL DIGITAL)
REC OUT (OPTICAL DIGITAL)
HDMI OUT
HEAD PHONES
PRE OUT
SURR
SB/FRONT
C, SW
PHONO
CD-R
CD
MD/TAPE
TUNER
DVD
DTV/LD
DVR
VCR
CBL/SAT
V-AUX
DOCK
PHONO EQ
INPUT
Selector
REC/Zone
Selector
FRONT
CENTER (Mono)
SURROUND
SUR BACK
FRONT PRES
REAR PRES
SUR BACK
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
VCR
DVR
MD/TAPE
CD-R
Amp Assign SEL
Switch(Replay)
Switch
Volume
Zone Mono
Source/REC
Selector
Switch
Switch
SPEAKER OUT
ZONE OUT
REC OUT
Power Amplifier
Main/Source
REC/Zone
Multi-ch
Main
NET
Zone
Source
REC
MULTI CH INPUT
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN with Video
Block diagrams
137 En
Additional
Information
■ Video section
IN (Front)
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
HDMI
Selector
HDMI
Rx
Selector
Video
I/P Converter
Video
Selector
Selector
HDMI
Tx
HDMI
Tx
OUT 1
OUT 2
INPUT
Selector
Video
Decoder
GUI
Processor
Video
I/P Converter
Video
Encoder
S
E
L
S
E
L
S
E
L
MONITOR OUT 1
MONITOR OUT 2
ZONE2 OUT
MONITOR OUT
V-AUX
HDMI
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
DOCK
INPUT
Selector
REC/Zone
Selector
Video
Decoder
Video
Encoder
Source/REC
Selector
Zone
OSD
S
E
L
DVR
VCR
MONITOR OUT
ZONE2 OUT 1
ZONE2 OUT 2
DVR
VCR
S
E
L
INPUT
Selector
REC/Zone
Selector
Source/REC
Selector
BD/HD DVD
DVD
CBL/SAT
DVR
V-AUX
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
DOCK
HDMI IN
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
S VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
HDMI OUT
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
ZONE2 OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO)
MONITOR OUT (S VIDEO)
REC OUT (S VIDEO)
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO)
ZONE2 OUT (VIDEO)
REC OUT (VIDEO)
YPbPr
Y/C
CVBS
Source/Main
REC/Zone
Source/Main
REC/Zone
Specifications
138 En
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω)
Front, Center, Surround, Surround back ............................................... 140 W
Front presence, Rear presence ................................................................. 50 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[Asia, General, China and Korea models]
Front L/R 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 185/230/290/385 W
• Maximum Useful Output power (JEITA) (1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)
[Asia, General, China and Korea models]
Front, Center, Surround, Surround back ............................................... 200 W
Front presence, Rear presence ................................................................. 75 W
• Maximum Output Power (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω)
[U.K. and Europe models]
Front, Center, Surround, Surround back ............................................... 240 W
Front presence, Rear presence ................................................................. 90 W
• Dynamic Headroom
8 Ω ......................................................................................................... 1.2 dB
• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ......................................................................... 155 W
• Damping Factor (IHF)
Front L/R 1 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................................... 150 or more
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO .................................................................................... 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc. ................................................................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Voltage
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) .................................................. 60 mV or more
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ..................................................... 2.4 V or more
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
AUDIO OUT ........................................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω
PRE OUT .................................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω
SUBWOOFER ............................................................................ 2.0 V/500 Ω
ZONE OUT ................................................................................ 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) .................................................. 150 mV/100 Ω
• Frequency Response
CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct ............................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ............................................................ 0 ± 0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to AUDIO OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ..................... 0.02% or less
CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W, 8 Ω) ................. 0.02% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R .................................................. 81 dB or more
CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ............................................. 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R .................................................................................... 70 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ................................. 70 dB/60 dB or more
CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R ..................... 70 dB/60 dB or more
• Tone Control (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer)
BASS Boost/Cut .......................................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................................. 350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................................. ±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ............................................................ 3.5 kHz
• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control
BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................................. 380 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................................ ±10 dB/10 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ............................................................ 1.6 kHz
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small) ................ 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .......................................................................... 24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Format [MONITOR OUT] (Wall Paper)
[Korea and General models] ......................................................... NTSC/PAL
[U.K., Europe, China and Asia models] ....................................... PAL/NTSC
• Video Format (Video Conversion) .................................................... NTSC/PAL
•Signal Level
Composite ................................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video .................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 or 0.3 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ..................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) ................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off) ........................... 70 dB or more
• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]
Component (Video Conversion Off)
............................................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB
• Video Format [ZONE OUT] (Gray Back)
[Korea and General models] ......................................................... NTSC/PAL
[U.K., Europe, China and Asia models] ....................................... PAL/NTSC
• Video signal type [ZONE COMPONENT OUT]
(Video conversion) ............................................................................ NTSC/PAL
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[General and Asia models] ................ AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] ...................................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ...................................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption ................................................................. 800 W/1000 VA
• Standby Power Consumption ......................................................... 0.1 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] .......................... 1500 W
• AC Outlets
[Asia, General and China models] .......................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
[U.K. model] ........................................................ 1 (100 W/0.4 A maximum)
[Europe model] ........................................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) .................................................. 435 x 210 x 497 mm
(17-1/8 x 8-1/4 x 19-9/16 in)
• Weight .............................................................................. 34.0 kg (74 lbs 15 oz)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
Specifications
139 En
Additional
Information
■ HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
y
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of
audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio
commentaries mixed down by using the following connections:
– multi-channel analog audio input (see page 35)
– DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL)
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component,
and set the component appropriately.
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio
signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI
components.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source
component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream
audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the
component). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for
example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray
Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of
the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.
Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following
resolutions:
Video signal format
– 480i/60 Hz
– 576i/50 Hz
– 480p/60 Hz
– 576p/50 Hz
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
Compatibility with Deep Color and xvYCC video signals
This unit accepts 30 or 36 bit Deep Color video signals. Set “HDMI
Resolution” to “Through” or “HDMI Processing” to “Off” (see
page 90) to output the Deep Color and xvYCC video signals from
the HDMI OUT jacks without any processing (see page 90). If you
set “HDMI Processing” to “On”and “HDMI Resolution” to other
than “Through”, this unit converts the Deep Color and xvYCC
video signals to the video signals with normal color depth and color
space. If the video monitor is not compatible with the Deep Color or
xvYCC video signals, the video source may not play back correctly.
Default input assignment of HDMI input jacks
Audio signal types
Audio signal
formats
Compatible media
2ch Linear
PCM
2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/
20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch
Linear PCM
8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/
20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, etc.
DSD 2/5.1ch,
2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
SACD, etc.
Bitstream Dolby Digital,
DTS
DVD-Video, etc.
Bitstream (High
definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD,
Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master
Audio, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio
Blu-ray Disc,
HD DVD, etc.
Notes
HDMI input jack Assigned input source
IN1 BD/HD DVD
IN2 DVD
IN3 CBL/SAT
IN4 DVR
Front HDMI IN jack V-AUX
The HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following
standards:
• HDMI Version 1.3a (High-Definition Multimedia Interface
Specification Version 1.3a) licensed by HDMI Licensing,
LLC.
• HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection
System) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC.
Index
140 En
■ Numerics
11.1-channel speaker connection ..................... 23
11.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 21
11.2-channel speaker connection ..................... 23
11.2-channel speaker layout ............................ 21
11ch Enhancer .................................................. 59
11ch Stereo ...................................................... 59
2ch Stereo ........................................................ 59
5.1-channel speaker connection ....................... 24
5.1-channel speaker layout ..............................22
5.2-channel speaker connection ....................... 24
5.2-channel speaker layout ..............................22
7.1-channel speaker connection ....................... 24
7.1-channel speaker layout ..............................22
7.2-channel speaker connection ....................... 24
7.2-channel speaker layout ..............................22
■ A
AC IN ............................................................... 20
AC OUTLET(S) ........................................ 20, 38
Action Game .................................................... 58
Adaptive DRC .................................................. 86
Adaptive DSP effect level ................................ 86
Adaptive DSP Lvl ............................................ 86
Adaptive dynamic range control ...................... 86
Adjusting speaker level .................................... 61
Adjusting tonal quality ..................................... 61
Advanced automatic setup ...............................46
Advanced setup .............................................. 119
Advanced sound configurations ....................... 72
Adventure ......................................................... 58
AMP, Operation mode selector ....................... 12
Arena ................................................................ 57
Audio and video synchronization .................... 88
Audio cable plugs ............................................ 28
Audio component connection .......................... 34
Audio component jacks ...................................20
Audio Info. ....................................................... 95
Audio information ............................................ 95
Audio input jack select .................................... 82
Audio input jack selection ............................... 52
AUDIO jacks ................................................... 28
Audio jacks ...................................................... 28
AUDIO SELECT ............................................. 52
Audio Select ............................................... 82, 93
Audio signal flow ............................................. 29
Auto ................................................................. 89
Auto Bypass ..................................................... 88
Auto bypass ...................................................... 88
Auto Setup, troubleshooting .......................... 126
Automatic audio delay adjustment .................. 89
■ B
Back ground video ........................................... 83
Background video source playback ................. 51
Basic automatic setup ...................................... 44
Basic, Manual Setup ........................................ 83
Basic, Manual setup ......................................... 83
Bass Cross Over ...............................................84
Bass cross over ................................................. 84
Bass Out ........................................................... 85
Bass out ............................................................ 85
Battery charge indicator,
Front panel display ......................................40
BGV ................................................................. 83
BI-AMP ......................................................... 120
bi-amplification connections ............................ 27
Bi-amplifier mode .......................................... 120
Blu-ray Disc player connection ........................31
Bndry Gain Comp ............................................84
Bookmarks, network menu ..............................66
Boundary gain compensation ...........................84
■ C
Cable plugs .......................................................28
Cellar Club .......................................................57
Center ...............................................................84
Center Image ....................................................81
Center Level .....................................................80
Center speaker ..................................................84
Center Width ....................................................80
Chamber ...........................................................56
Channel Mute ...................................................89
Channel mute ....................................................89
Church in Freiburg ...........................................56
Church in Royaumont ......................................56
Church in Tokyo ...............................................56
Cinema .............................................................73
CINEMA DSP HD³ mode ................................60
CINEMA DSP indicator,
Front panel display .......................................40
CLASSICAL 1 .................................................55
CLASSICAL 2 .................................................56
Component I/P ..................................................90
Component interlace/progressive
conversion ....................................................90
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ....................20, 28
COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks ...................20
Configuration ...................................................85
Connecting a DVD recorder .............................33
Connecting a multi-format player ....................35
Connecting a VCR ...........................................33
Connecting an external decoder .......................35
Connecting an iPod universal dock ..................36
Connecting audio components .........................34
Connecting external amplifiers ........................35
Connecting network .........................................37
Connecting power cable ...................................38
Connecting speaker cable .................................27
Connecting subwoofers ....................................25
Connecting the USB memory devices .............37
Connecting to the rear USB ports ....................37
Connection a Blu-ray Disc player ....................31
Connection an HD DVD player .......................31
Connection, DVD player ..................................32
Connection, projector .......................................30
Connection, set-top box ....................................32
Connection, TV monitor ..................................30
Controlling other components,
remote control ............................................103
Conversion .......................................................89
Cooling fan operation mode ...........................120
■ D
Decoder descriptions ........................................72
Decoder indicators, Front panel display ...........40
Decoder Mode ..................................................94
Decoder parameter descriptions .......................80
Decoder selection .............................................72
Decoder Type ...................................................78
Default audio input jack select .........................93
Default decoder mode ......................................94
Default Gateway ...............................................92
Default gateway ................................................92
DHCP ...............................................................92
DHCP setting ....................................................92
Dialogue Lift, Sound field parameter .............. 77
Digital audio jacks ........................................... 20
DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks ............................. 28
DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks .............................. 28
Dimension ........................................................ 81
Dimmer ............................................................ 93
Dimmer ............................................................ 93
Dipole speaker using ........................................ 21
Direct ............................................................... 80
Disco ................................................................ 58
Display window, remote control ...................... 12
DNS Server (P) ................................................ 92
DNS Server (S) ................................................ 92
DOCK terminal ................................................ 20
Drama ............................................................... 58
DSP indicators, Front panel display ................ 40
DSP Level, Sound field parameter .................. 77
DVD player connection ................................... 32
DVD recorder connection ................................ 33
Dynamic Range ................................................ 87
Dynamic range ................................................. 87
■ E
Effect sound level
of the sound field parameter ........................ 77
ENHANCER .................................................... 59
ENHANCER indicator, Front panel display
....... 41
ENTERTAIN ................................................... 57
External amplifier connection .......................... 35
External decoder connection ............................ 35
■ F
FAN MODE ................................................... 120
Files/Directories, USB menu ........................... 66
Front ................................................................. 84
Front Panel Disp. ............................................. 93
Front panel display .......................................... 40
Front panel display message scroll .................. 93
Front panel display setting ............................... 93
Front panel door ............................................... 12
Front Presence .................................................. 84
Front Presence L Level .................................... 80
Front Presence R Level .................................... 80
Front presence speakers ............................. 26, 84
Front speaker set selection ............................... 51
Front speakers .................................................. 84
Front/rear USB port indicator,
Front panel display ...................................... 40
■ G
Genres, network menu ..................................... 66
Graphic user interface (GUI) screen ................ 74
Graphical user interface menu ......................... 53
GUI language setting ....................................... 39
GUI menu ........................................................ 53
GUI screen position ......................................... 90
■ H
Hall in Amsterdam ........................................... 56
Hall in Frankfurt .............................................. 55
Hall in Munich A ............................................. 55
Hall in Munich B ............................................. 55
Hall in Stuttgart ................................................ 56
Hall in USA A ................................................. 56
Hall in USA B .................................................. 56
Hall in Vienna .................................................. 56
HD Cubic indicator, Front panel display ......... 40
HD DVD player connection ............................ 31
HDMI ............................................................... 28
Index
Index
141 En
Additional
Information
HDMI Aspect .................................................. 90
HDMI aspect ratio ........................................... 90
HDMI Auto ...................................................... 88
HDMI automatic lip sync mode ...................... 88
HDMI IN jack select ........................................ 94
HDMI indicator, Front panel display .............. 40
HDMI jack ....................................................... 28
HDMI jacks ..................................................... 20
HDMI monitor check ..................................... 120
HDMI OUT jack select .................................... 94
HDMI Processing ............................................ 90
HDMI Resolution ............................................ 90
HDMI Set ........................................................ 94
HDMI settings ................................................. 94
HDMI video processing ................................... 90
HDMI video signal resolution ......................... 90
HDMI, troubleshooting ................................. 124
Headphone using ............................................. 51
Headphones indicator, Front panel display
......... 40
Help, network menu ........................................ 66
HiFi DSP .......................................................... 55
Hi-fi sound playback ....................................... 61
■ I
I/O Assignment ................................................ 81
ID1/ID2 indicator, remote control ................... 12
Information ...................................................... 93
Information display, remote control ................ 12
Infrared window, remote control ..................... 12
Init. Delay ........................................................ 78
Initial Volume .................................................. 86
Initial volume ................................................... 86
INITIALIZE .................................................. 120
Initialize, Sound field parameter ..................... 81
Input ................................................................. 94
Input channel indicators,
Front panel display ...................................... 41
Input output jack select .................................... 94
Input Select ...................................................... 81
Input signal indicators,
Front panel display ...................................... 40
Input signal information, GUI menu ............... 95
Input source indicators,
Front panel display ...................................... 40
Input/output assignment .................................. 81
Internet Radio using ......................................... 69
Internet Radio, network menu ......................... 66
IP Address ........................................................ 92
IP address ......................................................... 92
iPod .................................................................. 93
iPod charge on the standby mode .................... 93
iPod settings ..................................................... 93
iPod universal dock connection ....................... 36
iPod using ........................................................ 64
iPod, troubleshooting ..................................... 126
■ J
Jacks ................................................................. 28
■ L
LAN STANDBY ........................................... 119
LAN standby .................................................. 119
LANGUAGE ................................................. 120
Language ....................................................... 120
Language, GUI menu ...................................... 95
Language, GUI menu ...................................... 95
Level ................................................................ 80
LFE Level ........................................................ 86
LIGHT, remote control .................................... 12
Lipsync ............................................................ 88
LIVE/CLUB .................................................... 56
Liveness ........................................................... 79
Loading system settings ................................... 98
Locations, network menu .................................66
Loudness Plus ...................................................84
Loudness plus setting .......................................84
Low-frequency effect level ..............................86
■ M
MAC Address ...................................................93
MAC address ....................................................93
MACRO .........................................................108
Macro programming, remote control .............107
Main 11ch Stereo .............................................91
Main zone 11-channel stereo ...........................91
Manual ........................................................89, 95
Manual ..............................................................95
Manual audio delay adjustment .......................89
Manual parametric equalizer configuration
of each speaker .............................................87
Max Volume .....................................................86
Maximum volume ............................................86
MCX-2000 using ..............................................68
Media Access Control address .........................93
Memory Guard .................................................94
Memory guard ..................................................94
Microphone base ..............................................11
MONITOR CHECK .......................................120
Mono Movie .....................................................59
MOVIE .............................................................58
Multi CH Assign ..............................................83
MULTI CH INPUT jacks .................................20
Multi channel assignment ................................83
Multi Zone, Manual Setup ...............................91
Multi zone, Manual setup .................................91
Multi-channel sources playback
with headphones ..........................................60
Multi-format player connection .......................35
Multi-information display,
Front panel display .......................................40
Multi-zone configuration ...............................111
Music Video .....................................................57
Muting audio output .........................................52
Muting Type ...............................................86, 92
Muting type ......................................................86
■ N
Neo:6 Cinema ...................................................72
Neo:6 Music .....................................................72
NET/USB, Manual Setup .................................92
NET/USB, Manual setup .................................92
Network ............................................................92
Network connection .........................................37
Network features
using USB features using .............................66
Network information ........................................93
Network menu ..................................................66
NETWORK port ..............................................20
Network settings ...............................................92
Network status ..................................................93
Network, troubleshooting ...............................124
New Stations, network menu ...........................66
■ O
On Screen .........................................................90
On-screen display time .....................................90
Operation mode selector, remote control .........12
OPTIMIZER MIC jack ....................................43
Optimizing speaker setting ...............................42
Option, Manual Setup ......................................93
Option, Manual setup .......................................93
Output ...............................................................94
■ P
Panorama ..........................................................80
Parameter initialization ..................................120
Parametric EQ .................................................. 87
Parametric equalizer ........................................ 87
Parametric equalizer data copy ........................ 87
Parametric equalizer information .................. 135
Parametric equalizer type select ...................... 87
party mode ..................................................... 118
Party Mode Set ................................................ 91
Party mode settings .......................................... 91
Party mode target zone setting ......................... 91
Pavilion ............................................................ 57
PC server using ................................................ 68
PC/MusicCAST, network feature .................... 66
PEQ Data Copy ............................................... 87
PEQ Select ....................................................... 87
Phase ................................................................ 85
Placing speakers .............................................. 21
Play Style ......................................................... 83
Playback basic procedure ................................ 50
Playback styles ................................................ 83
Playing video sources in the background ........ 51
PLII Game ....................................................... 72
PLII Movie ...................................................... 72
PLII Music ....................................................... 72
PLIIx Game ..................................................... 72
PLIIx Movie .................................................... 72
PLIIx Music ..................................................... 72
Podcasts, network menu .................................. 66
Popular Stations, network menu ...................... 66
Position ............................................................ 90
Power cable connection ................................... 38
PRE AMP indicator, Front panel display ........ 41
PRE OUT jacks ............................................... 20
PREAMP MODE .......................................... 120
Pre-amplifier mode ........................................ 120
Presence speaker indicators,
Front panel display ...................................... 41
Presence speaker using .................................... 26
Primary DNS server ......................................... 92
PRO LOGIC .................................................... 72
Program parameters initialization .................... 81
Programming macro operations ..................... 108
Projector connection ........................................ 30
PURE DIRECT ................................................ 61
Pure Direct ....................................................... 89
Pure Direct ....................................................... 89
■ Q
Quick automatic setup ..................................... 43
■ R
Rear panel ........................................................ 20
Rear Presence .................................................. 85
Rear Presence L Level ..................................... 80
Rear Presence R Level ..................................... 80
Rear presence speakers .............................. 26, 85
Rear USB port connection ............................... 37
Recital/Opera ................................................... 57
RECOUT indicator, Front panel display ......... 40
REMOTE CON AMP .................................... 119
Remote control code default settings ............. 104
Remote control codes settings ....................... 104
Remote control ID setting .............................. 119
Remote control using ....................................... 12
Remote control, troubleshooting ................... 124
REMOTE IN jack ............................................ 36
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ................................. 20
REMOTE OUT jack ........................................ 36
REMOTE SENSOR ...................................... 119
Remote sensor ................................................ 119
Rename ............................................................ 82
Rename ............................................................ 82
Repeat .............................................................. 65
Index
142 En
Repeat iPod playback ....................................... 65
Resetting the system ...................................... 127
Rev. Delay ....................................................... 79
Rev. Level ........................................................ 80
Rev. Time ......................................................... 79
Roleplaying Game ...........................................58
Room Size ........................................................78
RS-232C STANDBY ..................................... 119
RS-232C terminal ............................................ 20
■ S
S VIDEO jacks ................................................. 28
Saving system settings ..................................... 96
SB Speaker Dist. .............................................. 84
SB. Init. Delay ................................................. 78
SB. Liveness .................................................... 79
SB. Room Size ................................................. 78
Sci-Fi ................................................................ 58
Scroll ................................................................ 93
Secondary DNS server .....................................92
Selecting audio input jacks ..............................52
Selecting decoders ........................................... 72
Selecting front speaker set ............................... 51
Selecting sound field programs ........................ 54
Selecting the
MULTI CH INPUT component .................. 50
Server, network menu ......................................66
Set the main zone to the standby mode ............ 39
Setting GUI language ....................................... 39
Setting speaker impedance ............................... 39
Set-top box connection .................................... 32
Setup ................................................................ 92
Setup ................................................................ 92
Short Message ..................................................90
Short message display ......................................90
Shortcut buttons, Network/USB features ......... 70
Shuffle .............................................................. 65
Shuffle iPod playback ......................................65
Signal Info., GUI menu .................................... 95
SILENT CINEMA ........................................... 60
SILENT CINEMA indicator,
Front panel display ......................................41
SLEEP indicator, Front panel display ..............41
Sleep timer ....................................................... 52
Sound field indicators, Front panel display
......... 40
Sound field parameter descriptions .................. 78
Sound field program selection .........................54
Sound field programs ....................................... 54
Sound field programs with headphones ........... 60
Sound field programs
without surround speakers ........................... 60
Sound, Manual Setup ....................................... 86
Sound, Manual setup ........................................ 86
SOURCE, Operation mode selector ................12
SP A B indicators, Front panel display ............40
Speaker B ......................................................... 91
Speaker B setting ............................................. 91
Speaker cable connection ................................. 27
Speaker Distance .............................................. 85
Speaker distance .............................................. 85
Speaker distances .............................................85
SPEAKER IMP. ............................................. 119
Speaker impedance ........................................ 119
Speaker impedance setting ............................... 39
Speaker Level .................................................. 86
Speaker level .................................................... 86
Speaker level adjustment ................................. 61
Speaker Set ...................................................... 84
Speaker setting optimize ..................................42
Speaker settings ............................................... 84
Speaker terminals ............................................. 20
Speaker wiring, Auto setup parameter ....... 44, 46
Speakers, placement .........................................21
Specifications .................................................138
Spectacle ...........................................................58
Sports ................................................................57
Standard ............................................................58
Standby Charge ................................................93
Standby mode, Zone2, Zone3 ........................116
Standby Through ..............................................94
Standby through ...............................................94
Standing wave control ......................................87
Status ................................................................93
STEREO ...........................................................59
Stereo program parameter descriptions ............80
Stereo/Surround menu, GUI menu ...................77
Stereo/Surround, GUI menu .............................77
STRAIGHT ......................................................60
Straight Enhancer .............................................59
STRAIGHT mode ............................................60
Subnet Mask .....................................................92
Subnet mask .....................................................92
Subwoofer ........................................................85
Subwoofer ..................................................25, 85
Subwoofer configuration ..................................85
Subwoofer connection ......................................25
Subwoofer phase ..............................................85
Subwoofer using ...............................................25
Supplied accessories .........................................11
Support Audio ..................................................94
Support audio ...................................................94
Sur. Back L Level .............................................80
Sur. Back R Level ............................................80
SUR. DECODE ................................................59
Sur. Init. Delay .................................................78
Sur. Liveness ....................................................79
Sur. Room Size .................................................78
Surround ...........................................................84
Surround Back ..................................................84
Surround back left/right speakers .....................84
Surround back speaker distance .......................84
Surround Decode ..............................................59
Surround decode mode .....................................72
Surround L Level .............................................80
Surround left/right speakers .............................84
Surround R Level .............................................80
S-wave control ..................................................87
System ..............................................................93
System ID .........................................................93
System Memory ...............................................96
System memory ................................................96
System reset ....................................................127
System setting saving .......................................96
System settings loading ....................................98
■ T
Target:Zone2 ....................................................91
Target:Zone3 ....................................................91
Target:Zone4 ....................................................91
The Bottom Line ..............................................57
The Roxy Theatre .............................................57
THX ..................................................................59
THX Set ............................................................83
THX settings ....................................................83
THX Ultra2 subwoofer setting .........................83
THX Ultra2 SWFR ...........................................83
Tonal quality adjustment ..................................61
Tone Control ....................................................88
Tone control .....................................................88
Transmit indicator, remote control ...................12
Treble ...............................................................88
Treble control ...................................................88
TRIGGER IN jacks ..........................................36
Trigger operation mode ....................................94
TRIGGER OUT jack ....................................... 20
Trigger Output ................................................. 94
Trigger output .................................................. 94
Troubleshooting ............................................. 122
Tuner Select ..................................................... 92
Turning off this unit ......................................... 39
Turning on the main zone
from the standby mode ................................ 39
Turning on this unit ......................................... 39
TV controlling by Remote control ................. 102
TV controlling, Remote control ..................... 102
TV FORMAT ................................................ 120
TV format ...................................................... 120
TV monitor connection .................................... 30
TV, Operation mode selector ........................... 12
■ U
Unit .................................................................. 85
Unit .................................................................. 85
Unprocessed input source playback ................. 60
USB memory device connection ..................... 37
USB memory device using .............................. 69
USB menu ........................................................ 66
USB port .......................................................... 20
USB port select ................................................ 83
USB portable audio player using ..................... 69
USB Select ....................................................... 83
USB, troubleshooting .................................... 124
USB, USB menu .............................................. 66
■ V
VCR connection ............................................... 33
Vertical dialogue position ................................ 77
VIDEO AUX jacks .......................................... 38
Video component jacks .................................... 20
Video conversion ............................................. 89
Video Info. ....................................................... 95
Video information ............................................ 95
VIDEO jacks .................................................... 28
Video jacks ...................................................... 28
Video Manual setup ......................................... 89
Video signal flow ............................................. 29
Video source playback in background ............. 51
Video, Manual Setup ....................................... 89
Village Gate ..................................................... 56
Village Vanguard ............................................. 56
Virtual CINEMA DSP ..................................... 60
VIRTUAL indicator, Front panel display ........ 40
VOLTAGE SELECTOR, Voltage selector
......... 12
VOLUME level indicator,
Front panel display ...................................... 41
Volume Trim ................................................... 82
Volume trimming ............................................. 82
Volume, Manual Setup .................................... 86
Volume, Manual setup ..................................... 86
■ W
Wake on RS-232C access .............................. 119
Wall Paper ........................................................ 91
Wall paper ........................................................ 91
Warehouse Loft ................................................ 57
Wiring, Auto setup parameter ....................44, 46
■ Y
YPAO .............................................................. 42
YPAO indicator, Front panel display .............. 41
■ Z
Zone 2 balance ................................................. 92
Zone 2 initial volume setting ........................... 92
Zone 2 Maximum volume setting .................... 91
Zone 2 monaural mode .................................... 92
Zone 2 settings ................................................. 91
Index
143 En
Additional
Information
Zone 2/3/4 muting type .................................... 92
Zone 2/3/4 tuner function select ...................... 92
Zone 3 balance ................................................. 92
Zone 3 initial volume setting ........................... 92
Zone 3 Maximum volume setting .................... 91
Zone 3 monaural mode .................................... 92
Zone 3 settings ................................................. 91
Zone 4 balance ................................................. 92
Zone 4 initial volume setting ........................... 92
Zone 4 Maximum volume setting .................... 91
Zone 4 monaural mode .................................... 92
Zone 4 settings ................................................. 91
Zone B feature ................................................. 51
Zone indicators, remote control ....................... 12
Zone on-screen display .................................... 92
Zone OSD ........................................................ 92
ZONE OUT jacks ............................................ 20
Zone SP Assign ............................................... 91
Zone speaker assignment ................................. 91
Zone video monitor ....................................... 114
Zone video out jacks ........................................ 20
Zone video signal conversion ........................ 114
Zone2 Balance ................................................. 92
Zone2 Initial Vol. ............................................ 92
Zone2 Max Vol. ............................................... 91
Zone2 Mono .................................................... 92
Zone2 Set ......................................................... 91
ZONE2/ZONE3/ZONE4 indicators,
Front panel display ...................................... 41
Zone3 Balance ................................................. 92
Zone3 Initial Vol. ............................................ 92
Zone3 Max Vol. ............................................... 91
Zone3 Mono .................................................... 92
Zone3 Set ......................................................... 91
Zone4 Balance ................................................. 92
Zone4 Initial Vol. ............................................ 92
Zone4 Max Vol. ............................................... 91
Zone4 Mono .................................................... 92
Zone4 Set ......................................................... 91
“
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “
3
DVD”
(example) indicates the name of the parts on
the front panel or the remote control. Refer to
the cover pages at the top of this manual for
the information about each position of the
parts.
144 En
TV
ACURA 00101
ADDISON 01201, 01601, 08401
ADMIRAL 01301, 02201, 05801
ADVENT 09601
AGB 06801
AIKO 01201
AKAI 00101, 00301, 02901,
04601, 06801, 08901,
10501
AKURA 03701
ALBA 00101, 00401, 04801,
08501
AMERICA ACTION
02701,
AMPRO 09401
AMSTRAD 00101, 00401, 02501,
04801, 05101, 05301,
06801
ANAM 00101, 02701, 03401
ANAM NATIONAL
03401, 08301
ANITECH 00101
AOC 00101, 00301, 00901,
01201, 01301, 01601,
02601, 02701, 05601
APEX DIGITAL
09301, 09701, 09901
ASA 01401
AUDIOSONIC 00401, 01701
AWA 00101
BANG & OLUFSEN
07201
BASIC 00101
BAUR 00401, 04601, 06701
BAYSONIC 02701
BEAUMARK 02601
BEKO 04701, 06201, 09001,
09101
BELL & HOWELL
02001
BEON 00401
BLAUPUNKT 02801
BLUE SKY 08501, 11401
BONDSTEC 03301
BRADFORD 02701
BRANDT 01701, 04201
BROKSONIC 03101, 05801
BUSH 00101, 00101, 00401,
04801, 04901, 08501,
11401
BYDESIGN 14301, 14401, 14501,
14601
CANDLE 00301
CARNIVALE 00301
CARVER 00801, 02401
CASCADE 00101
CATHAY 00401
CCE 00401
CELEBRITY 00001
CELERA 09701
CENTURION 00401
CGE 03301
CHANGHONG 09701
CHING TAI 00101, 01201
CHUN YUN 00001, 00101, 01201,
02701
CHUNG HSIN 00701, 01601, 02701
CIMLINE 00101
CINERAL 01201, 05601
CITIZEN 00301, 00901, 01201
CLARION 02701
CLARIVOX 00401
CLATRONIC 03301, 04701
CONDOR 04101, 04701
CONRAC 10301
CONTEC 00101, 02701
CRAIG 02701
CROSLEY 00801
CROWN 00101, 00401, 02701,
04701, 05201
CTC 03301
CURTIS MATHES
00301, 00501, 00801,
00901, 01301, 01801,
02001, 02301, 05601,
08901, 11801, 12201
CXC 02701
DAEWOO 00101, 00301, 00401,
01201, 01601, 02001,
02401, 02601, 02701,
04901, 05601, 07901,
08201, 13101
DANSAI 00401
DAYTON 00101
DE GRAAF 02901, 06901
DECCA 00401, 06801
DENON 01801
DIGATRON 00401
DIXI 00101, 00401
DUMONT 00201
DWIN 09201, 10101
ECE 00401
ELBE 03501
ELECTROBAND
00001
ELIN 00401, 06901
ELITE 04101
ELTA 00101
EMERSON 02001, 02601, 02701,
03101, 04601, 05801,
07901
ENVISION 00301, 10601
EPSON 11001
ERRES 00401
ETHER 00101, 00301
ETRON 00101
EUROPHON 06801
FERGUSON 00401, 01001, 01701,
03201, 03801, 04201,
07101
FIDELITY 04601
FINLANDIA 02901, 04401
FINLUX 00401, 01401, 01501,
04401, i06801
FIRSTAR 00101, 03101
FIRSTLINE 00101, 03301, 08501
FISHER 01401, 02001, 02901,
04701
FLINT 05701
FORMENTI 00401, 04101
FORTRESS 01301
FRONTECH 02201, 03301, 03701
FUJITSU 08701, 10401
FUNAI 02501, 02701, 03701
FUTURETECH 02701
GATEWAY 13301, 13401
GE 00301, 00501, 00601,
01201, 02601, 02701,
05601, 07101, 11801,
12201, 12601
GEC 00401, 06801
GELOSO 00101
GENEXXA 02201
GIBRALTER 00201, 00301
GOLDSTAR 00301, 00401, 01701,
02001, 02601, 05001
GOODMANS 00401, 04801, 04901,
08201
GOREMJE 04701
GRADIENTE 00701, 02401
GRAETZ 02201, 04601
GRANADA 00401, 02901, 04301,
06801
GRANDIN 07701
GRUNDIG 00401, 02801, 06301,
07001, 07401
GRUNPY 02701
HALLMARK 02601
HANKOOK 00301, 02601, 02701
HANSEATIC 00401, 04101, 04601,
05201, 07001
HANTAREX 06801
HARMAN/KARDON
00801
HARVARD 02701
HAVERMY 01301
HCM 00101, 05101
HELLO KITTY 05601
HINARI 00101, 00401
HISAWA 05701
HITACHI 00101, 00301, 01201,
01501, 01701, 01801,
02201, 02601, 03001,
04501, 06101, 06901,
07301, 11701, 12101
HUA TUN 00101
HUANYU 04901
HYPSON 00401, 03701
ICE 03701, 04801
IMPERIAL 03301, 04701, 05201
INDIANA 00401
INFINITY 00801
INGELEN 02201
INNO HIT 06801
INNOVA 00401
INTEQ 00201
INTERFUNK 00401, 02201, 03301,
04601, 06701
INTERVISION 00401, 03701, 05001
ITS 04801
ITT 02201, 04601, 06901
JBL 00801
JCB 00001
JEAN 00101, 00601, 01201,
02101, 03101
JENSEN 09601
JVC 00701, 04801, 05801,
08401, 08701
KAISUI 00101
KAPSCH 02201
KARCHER 07701
KATHREIN 07001
KEC 02701
KENDO 00401
KENWOOD 00301
KNEISSEL 03501, 05401
KOLIN 00701, 01601, 02701
KORPEL 00401
KOYODA 00101
KTV 00301, 02701
L&S ELECTRONIC
10301
LEYCO 00401, 03701
LG 00301, 00401, 00901,
01601, 02601, 09001
LIESENK & TTER
00401
LOEWE 06701
LUXOR 04501, 04601
LXI 00501, 00801, 02001,
02101, 02601
M ELECTRONIC
00101, 00401, 01401,
01501, 01701, 02201,
03801, 04401, 04901,
06001
MAGNADYNE 03301, 06801
MAGNAFON 06801
MAGNAVOX 00301, 00801, 12001,
12601
MANESTH 03701, 04101
MARANTZ 00301, 00401, 00801,
07001
MARK 00401
MATSUI 00101, 00401, 02901,
04801, 06301, 06801
MATSUSHITA 03401, 08301
MEDIATOR 00401
MEDION 08501, 10301, 11401
MEGATRON 01801, 02601
MEMOREX 00101, 01901, 02001,
02601, 03401, 05801,
11401
METZ 05501
MGA 00301, 01901, 02601
MICROMAXX 10301
MICROSTAR 10301
MIDLAND 00201, 00501, 00601
MINERVA 06301
MINOKA 05101
MITSUBISHI 00301, 01301, 01601,
01901, 02001, 02601,
02701, 03101, 03401,
06701, 11201, 11901
MIVAR 03901, 04001, 06801,
07601
MOTOROLA 01301
MTC 00301, 00901, 06701
MULTITECH 00101, 02701
MYRYAD 07001
NAD 02101, 02601, 04601,
11301
NEC 00101, 00301, 00601,
02001, 02101, 02401,
02601, 05701, 06501,
13201
NECKERMANN
00401, 07001
NEI 00401
NETSAT 00401
NEWAVE 00101, 01201, 01301,
02601
NIKKAI 00401, 03701
NIKKO 00301, 01201, 02601
NOKIA 04601, 05901, 06001,
06901, 08101
NORCENT 09301, 10801
NORDMENDE 01701, 03801, 07101
NTC 01201
OCEANIC 02201, 04601
ONWA 02701, 05301
OPTIMUS 02001, 02301, 03401,
08301
OPTONICA 01301
ORION 00401, 03101, 04101,
05801, 06801
OSAKI 03701, 05101
OTTO VERSAND
00401, 04101, 06701,
07001
PALLADIUM 04701, 05201
PANAMA 03701
PANASONIC 00401, 00601, 00801,
02201, 03401, 08301,
12401
PATHE CINEMA
03201, 04101
PAUSA 00101
PENNEY 00301, 00501, 00601,
00901, 02101, 02601,
12201
PERDIO 04101
PHILCO 00301, 00401, 00801,
01801, 02601, 02701,
03301, 05801, 13101
PHILIPS 00001, 00301, 00401,
00601, 00801, 01201,
01601, 02601, 04901,
07001, 08801, 12601
PHONOLA 00401
PILOT 00301
PIONEER 01701, 02201, 02301,
03801, 08601, 09501,
11301
PORTLAND 01201
PRANDONI-PRINCE
06801
PRIMA 09601
PRISM 00601
PROFEX 00101, 04601
PROSCAN 00501
PROTECH 00101, 00401, 03301,
03701, 05201, 08501
PROTON 00101, 00301, 02601
PULSAR 00201
QUASAR 00601, 03401, 08301
QUELLE 00401, 01401, 04601,
06701
RADIOLA 00401
RADIOMARELLI
06801
RADIOSHACK 00301, 00501, 02001,
02601, 02701
List of remote control codes
145 En
Additional
Information
List of remote control codes
RCA 00001, 00301, 00501,
01101, 01201, 02601,
08601, 11501, 11801,
13901, 12201, 12501,
12601, 12801
REALISTIC 00301, 02001, 02601,
02701
REDIFFUSION 04601
REOC 09001
REVOX 00401
REX 02201, 03501, 03701
RFT 05201
R-LINE 00401
ROADSTAR 00101, 03701, 05201
RUNCO 00201, 00301, 06501,
07501
SABA 01701, 02201, 03801,
04201
SACCS 03201
SAGEM 07701
SAISHO 00101, 03701, 06801
SALORA 02201, 04601, 06901
SAMBERS 06801
SAMPO 00101, 00301, 01201,
01301, 02001, 02501,
02601, 08301, 13301
SAMSUNG 00101, 00301, 00401,
00901, 01101, 01201,
02001, 02601, 03701,
04701, 07001, 07401,
07801, 08901, 09801,
10501, 10701
SANSEI 05601
SANSUI 05801
SANYO 01401, 02001, 02701,
02901, 04301, 10201
SBR 00401
SCHAUB LORENZ
04601
SCHNEIDER 00401, 03301, 04801,
08501
SCOTCH 02601
SCOTT 02601, 02701, 03101
SEARS 00501, 00801, 02001,
02101, 02501, 02601
SEG 03701, 08501
SEI 06801
SELECO 02201, 03501
SEMIVOX 02701
SEMP 02101
SHARP 00301, 01301, 08301
SHEN YING 00101, 01201
SHENG CHIA 00101, 01301, 03101
SIAREM 06801
SIEMENS 00401, 02801
SINUDYNE 06801
SKANTIC 04501
SKY 00401
SKYGIANT 02701
SKYWORTH 00401
SOLAVOX 02201
SONITRON 02901
SONOKO 00101, 00401
SONOLOR 02201, 02901
SONTEC 00401
SONY 00001, 08301, 11101,
11601, 12701, 12901
SOUNDESIGN 02601, 02701
SOUNDWAVE 00401, 05201
SOWA 00601, 00901, 01201,
02101, 02601
SQUAREVIEW 02501
SSS 02701
STANDARD 00101
STARLITE 02701
STERN 02201, 03501
SUPREME 00001
SYLVANIA 00301, 00801, 02501
SYMPHONIC 02501, 02701
SYNCO 00001, 00901, 01201,
01301, 02601, 05601
SYSLINE 00401
T + A 05501
TACICO 00101, 01201, 02601
TAI YI 00101
TANDY 01301, 02201
TASHIKO 01201, 08301
TATUNG 00101, 00401, 00601,
00801, 00901, 02001,
02101, 06801
TCM 10301
TEAC 00101, 00401, 03701,
05101, 05201, 05701,
08501, 11401
TEC 03301
TECHNEMA 04101
TECHNICS 00601, 03401, 08301
TECHWOOD 00601
TECO 00101, 00601, 01201,
01301, 02601, 03701,
08401
TEKNIKA 00801, 00901, 01201,
01901, 02701
TELEFUNKEN 01701, 03601, 04201,
08001, 08901
TELEMEISTER
04101
TELETECH 00101
TENSAI 04101
TERA 00301
THOMSON 01701, 03801, 07101,
08001, 12501
THORN 00401, 01401, 04601,
06701
TMK 02601
TNCI 00201
TOSHIBA 00901, 02001, 02101,
06601, 07801, 08301,
10901, 12101, 12301,
13001, 13201
TRIUMPH 06801
TUNTEX 00101, 00301, 01201
TVS 05801
UHER 04101
UNIVERSUM 00401, 01401, 01501,
03701, 04401, 04701,
06401
VECTOR RESEARCH
00301
VESTEL 00401
VICTOR 00701, 03401, 08301,
08401
VIDEOSAT 03301
VIDIKRON 00801
VIDTECH 02601
VIEWSONIC 13301
VISION 04101
VOXSON 02201
WALTHAM 04501
WARDS 00301, 00801, 02601,
11301
WATSON 00401, 04101
WAYCON 02101
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
00401, 04101, 05801,
07901
Yamaha 00301, 01801, 08301,
10001, 11001, 13501,
13601, 13701, 13801,
14001, 14101, 14201
YAPSHE 03401
YOKO 00401, 03701
ZENITH 00201, 01201, 02601,
05801
VCR
ADMIRAL 01102
ADVENTURA 00002
AIKO 02102
AIWA 00002, 00402, 02202,
02602, 02702
AKAI 00602, 02302
AKIBA 01402
ALBA 01402, 02102, 02302,
02702
AMERICA ACTION
02102
AMERICAN HIGH
00302
AMSTRAD 00002
ANAM 00402, 01902, 02002,
02102, 02902
ANAM NATIONAL
01902, 04502
ANITECH 01402
ASA 00402, 01502
ASHA 02002
ASUKA 00402
AUDIOVOX 00402, 02102
BAIRD 00002, 00602, 01602
BASIC LINE 01402, 02102
BEAUMARK 02002
BELL & HOWELL
01602
BLAUPUNKT 01902
BRANDT 02402
BRANDT ELECTRONIC
00602
BROKSONIC 01702, 02602, 04402
BUSH 01402, 02102, 02702
CALIX 00402
CANON 00302
CARVER 01502
CCE 01402, 02102
CGE 00002
CIMLINE 01402
CINERAL 02102
CITIZEN 00402, 02102, 04302
COLT 01402
COMBITECH 02702
CRAIG 00402, 01002, 01402,
02002
CROWN 01402, 02102
CURTIS MATHES
00302, 00602, 01202,
03702
CYBERNEX 02002
CYRUS 01502
DAEWOO 00902, 01602, 02102,
03402, 04302
DANSAI 01402
DE GRAAF 00702
DECCA 00002, 01502
DENON 00702
DUAL 00602
DUMONT 00002, 01502, 01602
DYNATECH 00002
ELCATECH 01402
ELECTROHOME
00402
ELECTROPHONIC
00402
EMEREX 00102
EMERSON 00002, 00302, 00402,
00802, 00902, 01702,
02002, 02102, 04302,
04402
ESC 02002, 02102
FERGUSON 00602, 02402
FIDELITY 00002
FINLANDIA 01502, 01602
FINLUX 00002, 00702, 01502,
01602
FIRSTLINE 00402, 00802, 00902,
01402
FISHER 01002, 01602
FUJI 00202, 00302
FUJITSU 00002, 00902
FUNAI 00002
GARRARD 00002
GE 00302, 01202, 02002,
03502, 03702, 03802
GEC 01502
GENERAL 00902
GO VIDEO 02802
GOLDHAND 01402
GOLDSTAR 00402, 01802, 02902,
04202
GOODMANS 00002, 00402, 01402,
02102
GRADIENTE 00002
GRAETZ 00602, 01602, 02002
GRANADA 01502, 01602
GRANDIN 00002, 00402, 01402
GRUNDIG 01402, 01502, 01902,
02502
HANSEATIC 00402
HARLEY DAVIDSON
00002
HARMAN/KARDON
01502
HARWOOD 01402
HCM 01402
HINARI 01402, 02002, 02702
HI-Q 01002
HITACHI 00002, 00402, 00602,
00702, 02002
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
00702
HYPSON 01402
IMPERIAL 00002
INTERFUNK 01502
ITT 00602, 01602, 02002
ITV 00402, 02102
JENSEN 00602
JVC 00602, 00902, 01302
KAISUI 01402
KEC 00402, 02102
KENWOOD 00602, 01302
KLH 01402
KODAK 00302, 00402
KOLIN 00602, 00802
KORPEL 01402
LENCO 02102
LEYCO 01402
LG 00402, 00702, 00902,
02902
LLOYD’S 00002
LOEWE 00402, 01502, 04502
LOGIK 01402, 02002
LUXOR 00802, 01102, 01602
LXI 00402
M ELECTRONIC
00002
MAGNASONIC 04302
MAGNAVOX 00002, 00302, 00502,
01502
MAGNIN 02002
MANESTH 00902, 01402
MARANTZ 00302, 01502
MARTA 00402
MATSUI 02602, 02702
MATSUSHITA 00302
MEDION 02602
MEI 00302
MEMOREX 00002, 00302, 00402,
00502, 01002, 01102,
01602, 02002, 02202,
02602, 04202
MEMPHIS 01402
METZ 00402, 02502, 04502
MGA 00802, 02002
MGN TECHNOLOGY
02002
MINOLTA 00702
MITSUBISHI 00602, 00802, 01302,
01502, 03502
MOTOROLA 00302, 01102
MTC 00002, 02002
MULTITECH 00002, 01402
MURPHY 00002
MYRYAD 01502
NAD 01602
NATIONAL 01902
NEC 00302, 00402, 00602,
01102, 01302, 01602
NECKERMANN
01502
NESCO 01402
NEWAVE 00402
NIKKO 00402
NOBLEX 02002
NOKIA 00602, 01602, 02002
NORDMENDE 00602, 02402
OCEANIC 00002, 00602
OKANO 02302, 02602
OLYMPUS 00302, 01902
OPTIMUS 00402, 01102, 01602,
02802
ORION 01702, 02602, 02702,
04402
OSAKI 00002, 00402, 01402
OTTO VERSAND
01502
PALLADIUM 00402, 00602, 01402
PANASONIC 00302, 01802, 01902,
03102, 03702, 04502
PATHE MARCONI
00602
PENNEY 00302, 00402, 00702,
02002, 03702, 04202
PENTAX 00702
PERDIO 00002
PHILCO 00302
PHILIPS 00302, 01502, 03202,
03902, 04002
PHONOLA 01502
PILOT 00402
PIONEER 00702, 01302, 01502
POLK AUDIO 01502
146 En
List of remote control codes
PROFITRONIC 02002
PROLINE 00002
PROSCAN 01202, 03802
PROTEC 01402
PULSAR 00502
PYE 01502
QUASAR 00302, 03702
QUELLE 01502
RADIOLA 01502
RADIOSHACK 00002
RADIX 00402
RANDEX 00402
RCA 00302, 00702, 01202,
02002, 03502, 03702,
03802
REALISTIC 00002, 00302, 00402,
01002, 01102, 01602
REOC 02602
REPLAYTV 03002, 03102
REX 00602
ROADSTAR 00402, 01402, 02002,
02102
RUNCO 00502
SABA 00602, 02402
SALORA 00802
SAMPO 00402, 01102
SAMSUNG 00902, 02002, 02802
SANKY 00502, 01102
SANSUI 00002, 00602, 01302,
04402
SANYO 01002, 01602, 02002
SAVILLE 02702
SBR 01502
SCHAUB LORENZ
00002, 00602, 01602
SCHNEIDER 00002, 01402, 01502
SCOTT 00802, 00902, 01702
SEARS 00002, 00302, 00402,
00702, 01002, 01602,
04202
SEG 02002
SEI 01502
SELECO 00602
SEMP 00902
SHARP 01102, 03502
SHINTOM 01402, 01602
SIEMENS 00402, 01502, 01602
SILVA 00402
SINGER 00902, 01402
SINUDYNE 01502
SONIC BLUE 03002, 03102
SONTEC 00402
SONY 00002, 00102, 00202,
00302, 03302, 04102
STS 00702
SUNKAI 02602
SUNSTAR 00002
SUNTRONIC 00002
SYLVANIA 00002, 00302, 00802,
01502
SYMPHONIC 00002
TANDY 00002, 01602
TASHIKO 00002, 00402
TATUNG 00002, 00602, 00902,
01302, 01502
TEAC 00002, 00602, 02102,
02202, 03402
TECHNICS 00302, 01902
TECO 00302, 00402, 00602,
01102
TEKNIKA 00002, 00302, 00402
TELEAVIA 00602
TELEFUNKEN 00602, 02402
TENOSAL 01402
TENSAI 00002
THOMAS 00002
THOMSON 00602, 01202, 01302,
02402
THORN 00602, 01602
TIVO 03202, 03302
TMK 02002
TOSHIBA 00602, 00802, 00902,
01302, 01502, 03602
TOTEVISION 00402, 02002
UHER 02002
UNITECH 02002
UNIVERSUM 00002, 00402, 01502,
02002
VECTOR 00902
VICTOR 00602, 01302
VIDEO CONCEPTS
00902
VIDEOMAGIC 00402
VIDEOSONIC 02002
VILLAIN 00002
WARDS 00002, 00302, 00702,
01002, 01102, 01202,
01402, 01502, 02002
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
01402
XR-1000 00002, 00302, 01402
Yamaha 00602
YAMISHI 01402
YOKAN 01402
YOKO 02002
ZENITH 00002, 00202, 00502,
04402
CABLE
ABC 00103, 00203
AMERICAST 02003
BELL SOUTH 02003
BIRMINGHAM CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
00803
BRITISH TELECOM
00103
DAERYUNG 00203, 01403, 01903
DIRECTOR 01303
FILMNET 01203
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
00103, 00803, 01303,
01703
GOLDSTAR 00503
HAMLIN 00303, 00703
JERROLD 00103, 00803, 01303,
01703
LG 00503
MEMOREX 00003
MNET 01203
MOTOROLA 00803, 01303, 01703,
02303
NOOS 01803
PACE 00603, 02203
PANASONIC 00003, 00203, 00403
PARAGON 00003
PHILIPS 01003, 01103
PIONEER 00503, 01603, 01903
PULSAR 00003
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
00103
QUASAR 00003
RCA 02403, 02503
REGAL 00703, 00903
RUNCO 00003
SAGEM 01803
SAMSUNG 00003, 00503
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
00203, 01403, 01903
SONY 02103
STARCOM 00103
SUPERCABLE 00803
TELE+1 01203
TORX 00103
TOSHIBA 00003
TRANS PX 00803
TS 00103
UNITED CABLE
00103
ZENITH 00003, 01503, 02003
SATELLITE TUNER
@SAT 06404
ABSAT 00104
ALBA 01404
ALPHASTAR 02504
AMSTRAD 03004
ASTON 00304, 05004
ASTRO 00604
ATSAT 06404
AVALON 01304
BLAUPUNKT 00604
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
03004, 05204
CANAL DIGITAL
03104
CANAL SATELLITE
03104
CANAL+ 03104
CHAPARRAL 00804
CITYCOM 05304
CONNEXIONS 01304
CROSSDIGITAL 04604
CYRUS 00704
DAERYUNG 01304
DAEWOO 06304
D-BOX 02104, 04904
DIGENIUS 01104
DIRECTV 00904, 01204, 01504,
01704, 02204, 02304,
02804, 04104, 04604,
05104, 06904
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
02604, 03704
DISHPRO 02604, 03704
DISTRATEL 00004
DMT 04004
DNT 00704, 01304
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
05804
ECHOSTAR 00504, 01304, 01604,
02604, 03104, 03604,
03704, 04304
ENGEL 03804
EXPRESSVU 02604
FINLUX 01404
FOXTEL 07004, 07104, 07204,
07304, 07404
FRACARRO 03604
FTE 03404
FUBA 01304
GALAXIS 03404, 04704
GE 01504
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
03504
GOI 02604
GOLD BOX 03104
GRUNDIG 00604, 03004
HIRSCHMANN
00604, 01304
HITACHI 01404, 02804
HTS 02604
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM
02304, 05104, 06904
HUMAX 03404, 05304
INVIDEO 03604
JVC 02604
KATHREIN 00104, 00604, 00704,
01004, 01804, 05604
KREISELMEYER
00604
LABGEAR 06304
LOGIX 03804
LORENZEN 01104
MAGNAVOX 02004, 02204
MANHATTAN 01404, 03804, 04204
MARANTZ 00704
MEDIASAT 03104
MEMOREX 02204
METRONIC 00004
MITSUBISHI 02304
MOTOROLA 03504
MYRYAD 00704
NEXT LEVEL 03504
NOKIA 01404, 02104, 02404,
04904, 05704, 06804
OCTALTV 03704
ORBITECH 04504
PACE 01404, 03004, 05204,
06604
PANASONIC 00904, 01904, 03004,
06504
PANDA 01404
PAYSAT 02204
PHILIPS 00204, 00704, 01404,
02004, 02204, 02304,
03104, 04104, 05104,
06904
PIONEER 03104
PROMAX 01404
PROSCAN 01204, 01504
RADIOLA 00704
RADIOSHACK 03504
RADIX 01304
RCA 00404, 01204, 01504,
03204
RFT 00704
SABRE 01404
SAGEM 02904, 04804, 05904
SAMSUNG 03804, 04604, 06004,
06204
SAT CONTROL 06404
SATSTATION 04204
SCHWAIGER 04704
SEEMANN 01304
SIEMENS 00604
SKY 03004, 03304, 05204
SM ELECTRONIC
05404
SONY 01704, 03004, 06704
STAR CHOICE 03504
STRONG 06404
TANTEC 01404
TECHNISAT 04404, 04504
TELESTAR 04504
THOMSON 01404, 03104, 03904,
06104
TOPFIELD 05504
TOSHIBA 02304, 02704, 06904
TPS 02904, 05904
ULTIMATETV 01204, 01704
UNIDEN 02004, 02204
UNIVERSUM 00604
VENTANA 00704
WISI 00604, 01304, 01404
XSAT 00104
ZEHNDER 04004
ZENITH 03304
CD PLAYER
AIWA 00605
ARCAM 00605
AUDIO RESEARCH
00605
AUDIO TON 00605
AUDIOLAB 00605
AUDIOMECA 00605
CAIRN 00605
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
00205
CARVER 00605, 00805
CYRUS 00605
DENON 01005
DKK 00005
DMX ELECTRONICS
00605
DYNAMIC BASS
00805
EMERSON 00905
FISHER 00805
GENEXXA 00305, 00905
GOODMANS 00905
GRUNDIG 00605
HARMAN/KARDON
00605, 00705
HITACHI 00305
JVC 00505
KENWOOD 00105, 00405
KRELL 00605
LINN 00605
LXI 00905
MAGNAVOX 00605, 00905
MARANTZ 00205, 00605
MATSUI 00605
MCS 00205
MEMOREX 00905
MERIDIAN 00605
MICROMEGA 00605
MIRO 00005
MISSION 00605
MYRYAD 00605
NAD 00005
NAIM 00605
NSM 00605
OPTIMUS 00005, 00305, 00405,
00805, 00905
PANASONIC 00205
PHILIPS 00605
PIONEER 00305, 00905
POLK AUDIO 00605
PROTON 00605
QED 00605
QUAD 00605
QUASAR 00205
RCA 00305, 00805, 00905
REALISTIC 00805
REVOX 00605
147 En
Additional
Information
List of remote control codes
ROTEL 00605
SAE 00605
SANSUI 00605, 00905
SANYO 00805
SCOTT 00905
SEARS 00905
SHARP 00405
SIMAUDIO 00605
SONIC FRONTIERS
00605
SONY 00005
SYMPHONIC 00905
TAG MCLAREN
00605
TANDY 00305
TECHNICS 00205
THORENS 00605
THULE 00605
UNIVERSUM 00605
VICTOR 00505
WARDS 00605
Yamaha 01105, 01205
CD RECORDER
KENWOOD 01305
MARANTZ 01305
PHILIPS 01305
Yamaha 01405
DVD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
02806
ALBA 02606
AMSTRAD 02306
APEX DIGITAL
02106, 02606, 03006,
03506, 03606, 03706,
04106
BLAUPINKT 02606
BLUE PARADE 01006
BUSH 02306
CENTREX 02106
CLATRONIC 03406
CYBERHOME 02406
DAEWOO 03206, 03306
DANSAI 03206
DECCA 03206
DENON 00006
DIAMOND 03106
DIGITREX 02106
DVD2000 00206
EMERSON 01206
ENTERPRISE 01206
FISHER 02006
GE 00306, 02606
GO VIDEO 02506
GOLDSTAR 02906
GRADIENTE 01806
GREENHILL 02606
GRUNDIG 00706
HITACHI 01106, 01906
HITEKER 02106
JVC 00906, 01306
KENWOOD 00006, 00606
KLH 02606
KOSS 01806
LG 02906
LIMIT 03106
MAGNAVOX 00106, 02206
MARANTZ 00706
MEMOREX 03806
MICO 02706
MICROSOFT 00306
MINTEK 02606
MITSUBISHI 00206
MUSTEK 02806
NESA 02606
ONKYO 00106
ORITRON 01806
PALSONIC 02106
PANASONIC 00006, 01606, 04206
PHILIPS 00106, 00706, 01706,
03906
PIONEER 00406, 01006, 01506,
01606
POLK AUDIO 00706
PROSCAN 00306
QWESTAR 01806
RCA 00306, 01006, 02606
ROTEL 01306
SAMSUNG 01106, 04506
SANYO 02006
SHARP 01406
SHERWOOD 03206
SHINSONIC 00506
SLIM ART 03306
SM ELECTRONIC
02806
SONY 00506, 04006
SYLVANIA 02206
TATUNG 03206
TEAC 01006, 02606
TECHNICS 00006
THETA DIGITAL
01006
THOMSON 00306
TOSHIBA 00106, 04606
URBAN CONCEPTS
00106
XBOX 00306
Yamaha 00006, 00706, 00806,
04306, 04406
ZENITH 00106, 01206, 02906
ZEUS 03306
DVD RECORDER
HITACHI 01507
PANASONIC 00007, 00107, 00207
PHILIPS 00807
PIONEER 00407, 00507, 00607
SHARP 01207, 01307
SONY 00907, 01007, 01107
TOSHIBA 00307
VICTOR 01407
Yamaha 00707
LD PLAYER
CARVER 00108
DENON 00008
MARANTZ 00108
MITSUBISHI 00008
NAD 00008
NAGSMI 00008
OPTIMUS 00008
PHILIPS 00108
PIONEER 00008
SALORA 00108
SONY 00208
TELEFUNKEN 00008
Yamaha 00308
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD 00109
ONKYO 00309
SHARP 00209
SONY 00009
Yamaha 00409, 00509, 00609
RECEIVER (TUNER)
ADC 00710
AIWA 00410, 01210, 03610,
03910, 04410
ALCO 03810
ANAM 04310
APEX DIGITAL
01810
AUDIOLAB 01510
AUDIOTRONIC 01510
AUDIOVOX 03810
BOSE 01610
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
03310
CAPETRONIC 00710
CARVER 01210, 01510
CENTREX 01810
DENON 03210
FERGUSON 00710
FINE ARTS 01510
GRUNDIG 01510
HARMAN/KARDON
00210, 02610
INTEGRA 00310, 02510
JBL 00210, 02710
JVC 00110, 00710, 03410,
04110
KENWOOD 01010, 03010
KLH 03810, 04010
MAGNAVOX 00710, 01210, 01510,
02110
MARANTZ 00010, 01210, 01510,
02410
MCS 00010
MICROMEGA 01510
MUSICMAGIC 01210
MYRYAD 01510
NAD 00610
NORCENT 03710
ONKYO 00310, 00810, 02510
OPTIMUS 00710, 00910
PANASONIC 00010, 02310, 04210,
04710
PHILIPS 01210, 01510, 01910,
02010, 02110, 02210,
02410
PIONEER 00710, 00910, 03510
POLK AUDIO 02410
PROSCAN 01710
QUASAR 00010
RCA 00710, 00910, 01710,
03810, 04310
SABA 00710
SANSUI 01210
SCHNEIDER 00710
SONY 00410, 01110, 01310,
04510, 04610
STEREOPHONICS
00910
SUNFIRE 03010
TEAC 03810
TECHNICS 00010, 02810, 02910,
04210
TELEFUNKEN 00710
THOMSON 01710
THORENS 01510
UHER 00710
VENTURER 03810
VICTOR 00110
WARDS 00410
Yamaha 00510, 01410, 03110,
04810, 05510, 05610,
05710, 05810
Yamaha (iPod)
05310
Yamaha (NET)
05410
TAPE DECK
AIWA 00111
CARVER 00111
GRUNDIG 00111
HARMAN/KARDON
00111
MAGNAVOX 00111
MARANTZ 00111
MYRYAD 00111
OPTIMUS 00011
PHILIPS 00111
PIONEER 00011
POLK AUDIO 00111
RCA 00011
REVOX 00111
SANSUI 00111
SONY 00211
THORENS 00111
WARDS 00011
Yamaha 00311, 00411
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2007 All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia WK97760
GEBRL
AV Amplifier
OWNER’S MANUAL
English
RX-Z11_EX-cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, October 4, 2007 10:13 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha DSP-Z11 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha DSP-Z11 Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha DSP-Z11 Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha DSP-Z11 Le manuel du propriétaire
- español: Yamaha DSP-Z11 El manual del propietario
- Deutsch: Yamaha DSP-Z11 Bedienungsanleitung
- dansk: Yamaha DSP-Z11 Brugervejledning
- suomi: Yamaha DSP-Z11 Omistajan opas
- svenska: Yamaha DSP-Z11 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha DSP-Z11 El kitabı
- română: Yamaha DSP-Z11 Manualul proprietarului
Gerelateerde artikelen
-
Yamaha RX-V2065 de handleiding
-
Yamaha A-S500 de handleiding
-
-
Yamaha DSP-Z7 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V765 de handleiding
-
-
-
-
Yamaha RX V3900 - AV Network Receiver Handleiding
-
Yamaha A-S801 de handleiding